diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore
index 0efad7bb..058d5560 100644
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -1,2 +1,4 @@
+_build/
+locales/**/*.mo
site/
-.DS_Store
\ No newline at end of file
+.DS_Store
diff --git a/Makefile b/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d4bb2cbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+# Minimal makefile for Sphinx documentation
+#
+
+# You can set these variables from the command line, and also
+# from the environment for the first two.
+SPHINXOPTS ?=
+SPHINXBUILD ?= sphinx-build
+SOURCEDIR = .
+BUILDDIR = _build
+
+# Put it first so that "make" without argument is like "make help".
+help:
+ @$(SPHINXBUILD) -M help "$(SOURCEDIR)" "$(BUILDDIR)" $(SPHINXOPTS) $(O)
+
+.PHONY: help Makefile
+
+# Catch-all target: route all unknown targets to Sphinx using the new
+# "make mode" option. $(O) is meant as a shortcut for $(SPHINXOPTS).
+%: Makefile
+ @$(SPHINXBUILD) -M $@ "$(SOURCEDIR)" "$(BUILDDIR)" $(SPHINXOPTS) $(O)
diff --git a/_docmap.md b/_docmap.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bc7b3274..00000000
--- a/_docmap.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-Documentation Map
-
-- admin dashboard
-- glossary
-- settings
-- users
-- content:
- - items
- - item sets
- - media
- - resource templates
- - vocabularies
-- sites
- - sites management
- - pages management
-- modules
- - modules (managing)
- - individual modules documentation
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/conf.py b/conf.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b1f71f14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/conf.py
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+# Configuration file for the Sphinx documentation builder.
+#
+# This file only contains a selection of the most common options. For a full
+# list see the documentation:
+# https://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/master/usage/configuration.html
+
+# -- Path setup --------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If extensions (or modules to document with autodoc) are in another directory,
+# add these directories to sys.path here. If the directory is relative to the
+# documentation root, use os.path.abspath to make it absolute, like shown here.
+#
+# import os
+# import sys
+# sys.path.insert(0, os.path.abspath('.'))
+
+
+# -- Project information -----------------------------------------------------
+
+project = 'Omeka S end user manual'
+copyright = '2021, Omeka Team'
+author = 'Omeka Team'
+
+
+# -- General configuration ---------------------------------------------------
+
+# Add any Sphinx extension module names here, as strings. They can be
+# extensions coming with Sphinx (named 'sphinx.ext.*') or your custom
+# ones.
+extensions = [
+ 'myst_parser'
+]
+
+myst_heading_anchors = 3
+
+source_suffix = {
+ '.rst': 'restructuredtext',
+ '.md': 'markdown',
+}
+
+# Add any paths that contain templates here, relative to this directory.
+templates_path = ['_templates']
+
+# List of patterns, relative to source directory, that match files and
+# directories to ignore when looking for source files.
+# This pattern also affects html_static_path and html_extra_path.
+exclude_patterns = [
+ '_build',
+ 'Thumbs.db',
+ '.DS_Store',
+ 'README.md',
+ 'style-guide.md',
+ 'translation.md',
+]
+
+
+# -- Options for HTML output -------------------------------------------------
+
+# The theme to use for HTML and HTML Help pages. See the documentation for
+# a list of builtin themes.
+#
+html_theme = 'sphinx_rtd_theme'
+
+gettext_compact = False
diff --git a/deploy b/deploy
index bf696816..27ef216e 100644
--- a/deploy
+++ b/deploy
@@ -1,2 +1,2 @@
-mkdocs build
-rsync -rv --delete site/ /websites/omekaorg/www/s/docs/user-manual
\ No newline at end of file
+make clean html
+rsync -rv --delete _build/html /websites/omekaorg/www/s/docs/user-manual
diff --git a/docs/accessibility.md b/docs/accessibility.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c53a404..00000000
--- a/docs/accessibility.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-# Accessibility Statement
-
-The Omeka team is committed to making Omeka S an accessible option for building collections and exhibits online. We are working to make the core code accessible and will continue to make accessibility for persons with disabilities a priority as we develop the code. Omeka strives to adhere to [W3C web design standards](http://www.w3.org/standards/) and to be compliant with [Section 508](http://www.section508.gov/) of the Americans with Disabilities Act (pdf).
-
-For more information, please review the following reports:
-- Omeka S version 3.x [Accessibility Conformance Report, using VPAT 2.4 Revised International Standards](files/OmekaS3x_ACR.pdf) (pdf), October 2020.
-- Omeka S version 2.x [Accessibility Conformance Report using VPAT version 2.0](files/VPAT_OmekaS2-0-1.pdf) (pdf), August 2019.
-- Omeka S version 1.x [Accessibility Conformance Report using VPAT version 1.1](files/VPAT2.0-OmekaS1-1.pdf) (pdf), April 2018.
-
-The following statements apply to Omeka S version 1.0.1 and higher:
-
-## Front End (Public view)
-
-The themes produced for Omeka S by RRCHNM have has the following features to improve accessibility:
-
-- [ARIA](http://www.w3.org/WAI/intro/aria) (Accessible Rich Internet Applications) landmarks for tabbing through page content, when not using a mouse or using a screen reader;
-- Semantic HTML5 markup.
-
-Please note that although the core code for Omeka S conform to the above standards, installations of Omeka S which have been customized or which are using non-RRCHNM modules and themes may lack some or all of these options. While we encourage developers to consider accessibility, we cannot guarantee that their code includes ARIA Landmarks, SkipNav, or other accessibility considerations.
-
-## Back End (Administrative view)
-
-The administrative dashboard of Omeka S has the following features for accessibility:
-
-- ARIA landmarks for screen readers on the Admin Dashboard, designating the header, navigation, main content, and footers.
-- Semantic HTML5 markup.
diff --git a/docs/accessibility.rst b/docs/accessibility.rst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7af5c06e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/accessibility.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Accessibility Statement
+=======================
+
+The Omeka team is committed to making Omeka S an accessible option for building
+collections and exhibits online. We are working to make the core code
+accessible and will continue to make accessibility for persons with
+disabilities a priority as we develop the code. Omeka strives to adhere to `W3C
+web design standards `_ and to be compliant with
+`Section 508 `_ of the Americans with Disabilities
+Act (pdf).
+
+For more information, please review the following reports:
+
+* Omeka S version 3.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report, using VPAT 2.4 Revised International Standards ` (pdf), October 2020.
+* Omeka S version 2.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report using VPAT version 2.0 ` (pdf), August 2019.
+* Omeka S version 1.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report using VPAT version 1.1 ` (pdf), April 2018.
+
+The following statements apply to Omeka S version 1.0.1 and higher:
+
+Front End (Public view)
+-----------------------
+
+The themes produced for Omeka S by RRCHNM have has the following features to improve accessibility:
+
+* `ARIA `_ (Accessible Rich Internet Applications) landmarks for tabbing through page content, when not using a mouse or using a screen reader;
+* Semantic HTML5 markup.
+
+Please note that although the core code for Omeka S conform to the above standards, installations of Omeka S which have been customized or which are using non-RRCHNM modules and themes may lack some or all of these options. While we encourage developers to consider accessibility, we cannot guarantee that their code includes ARIA Landmarks, SkipNav, or other accessibility considerations.
+
+Back End (Administrative view)
+------------------------------
+
+The administrative dashboard of Omeka S has the following features for accessibility:
+
+* ARIA landmarks for screen readers on the Admin Dashboard, designating the header, navigation, main content, and footers.
+* Semantic HTML5 markup.
diff --git a/docs/admin/users.md b/docs/admin/users.md
index 34cc9822..b36fe8d3 100644
--- a/docs/admin/users.md
+++ b/docs/admin/users.md
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ On this tab, create a new password. It must be entered twice, in both the *new p
-To see the password requirements, click the arrow next to the New Password field. This will display a list of [requirements](../../configuration) if any have been configured.
+To see the password requirements, click the arrow next to the New Password field. This will display a list of [requirements](../configuration) if any have been configured.
### API Key
Use this tab to generate an API key for the user. You must provide a label for the key - this could be a date or the purpose of the key. Click save to generate the key.
diff --git a/docs/content/item-sets.md b/docs/content/item-sets.md
index 366b3680..7c7b6f30 100644
--- a/docs/content/item-sets.md
+++ b/docs/content/item-sets.md
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ By default, Omeka S will use the media from the first item added to an item set
-The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../../sites/site_theme/#settings-options).
+The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-options).
To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side.
diff --git a/docs/content/items.md b/docs/content/items.md
index 4e44c47e..f5d935f2 100644
--- a/docs/content/items.md
+++ b/docs/content/items.md
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ By default, Omeka S will use the topmost media to generate a thumbnail for the i
When you use an asset thumbnail instead of uploading media, the asset thumbnail does not display on the item's public show page. This makes such thumbnails useful for items which have no media but which would benefit from a thumbnail for the browse view, or for items whose media does not render an elegant thumbnail, such as audio or visual files.
-The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../../sites/site_theme/#settings-options).
+The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-options).
To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side.
diff --git a/docs/content/media.md b/docs/content/media.md
index b31ee991..5c273b12 100644
--- a/docs/content/media.md
+++ b/docs/content/media.md
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Options for navigating and creating items display above the table of items.
On the left side is a display for the number of pages of media, with forward and back arrows. The current page number is an editable field - enter any valid page number and hit return/enter on your keyboard to go to that page.
-In the center top is a button for [Advanced Search](../../search#media-advanced-search).
+In the center top is a button for [Advanced Search](../search.md#media-advanced-search).
Just above the table on the right are options for sorting media, with two dropdown menus. The first lets you select between *Title*, *Class*, *Owner*, *(date)Created*, and *Size*; the second allows you to sort ascending or descending. To apply, click the *sort* button.
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ To edit existing media, you can:
- Go to the Media browse page, click on the title to view the media's metadata and then click the "*Edit media* button in the upper right hand corner
- Click on the media's name in the right-hand sidebar of an item's page to go to the media's metadata, and then click on *Edit media* from there.
-Editing media is very similar to editing [items](../../content/items) or [item sets](../../content/item-sets).
+Editing media is very similar to editing [items](../content/items) or [item sets](../content/item-sets).
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ In the image below, the first property (Title) is public as indicated by the ope
**Thumbnail** Not all media generate an elegant thumbnail, for example pdf or text file documents or some video files. You can use this option to set a representative thumbnail for the media which will be used on browse pages but not on the page for the item or its media.
-The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../../sites/site_theme/#settings-options).
+The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-options).
To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side.
diff --git a/docs/frontpage.md b/docs/frontpage.md
index b8cc38c2..a86fd45b 100644
--- a/docs/frontpage.md
+++ b/docs/frontpage.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@ The page displays all sites which a user has permission to see, along with the s
-If you want this site to be hidden from site visitors, you can use the [setting Default Site](admin/settings/#global-settings) to select a public site on your installation to which visitors will be redirected when they navigate to your base url (`yourdomain.net/omekas/`)
+If you want this site to be hidden from site visitors, you can use the [setting Default Site](admin/settings.md#global-settings) to select a public site on your installation to which visitors will be redirected when they navigate to your base url (`yourdomain.net/omekas/`)
-You can use the Default Site option in conjunction with the [site page block](sites/site_pages/#page-blocks) "List of sites" to create a branded site index and to add an about page for the overall installation.
+You can use the Default Site option in conjunction with the [site page block](sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks) "List of sites" to create a branded site index and to add an about page for the overall installation.
diff --git a/docs/index.md b/docs/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 75e79516..00000000
--- a/docs/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-# Omeka S User Manual
-
-Omeka S is a web publication system for universities, galleries, libraries, archives, and museums. It creates a local network of independently curated exhibits sharing a collaboratively built pool of items and their metadata.
-
-The sections of this manual correspond to the navigation sections on the left-hand side of the [administrative dashboard](admin-dashboard.md) of an Omeka S Installation:
-
-**Sites**
-Creating, editing, and managing sites, the public-facing parts of an Omeka S installation.
-
-**Resources**
-Creating, editing, and managing the content of an installation: items, item sets, media, vocabularies, and resource templates.
-
-**Admin**
-Access to functionality in the admin section varies by user role, but can include: users, jobs, and settings.
-
-**Modules**
-This section opens with basic information on managing the modules which extend the functionality of your Omeka S installation and sites. It then offers specific documentaiton for Omeka S modules created by RRCHNM, listed in alphabetial order.
-
-This manual also includes a [glossary](glossary.md), instructions on conducting [searches](search.md), and how to turn on [error logging](errorLogging.md).
-
-Screencasts to supplement the documentation are linked from relevant pages, and can be browsed in the [Omeka S collection on Vimeo](https://vimeo.com/showcase/4215056).
-
-This documentation is CC-BY-NC
diff --git a/docs/modules/collecting.md b/docs/modules/collecting.md
index cd92724a..8d265c97 100644
--- a/docs/modules/collecting.md
+++ b/docs/modules/collecting.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ The Collecting module allows you to gather public contributions through your sit
Once activated on the [modules](index.md) tab of the admin dashboard, Collecting is configured on a site-by-site basis.
-### Integrations
+## Integrations
Collecting integrates with the [Custom Vocab](../modules/customvocab/) and the [Numeric data types](../modules/numericdatatypes/) modules.
diff --git a/docs/modules/csvimport.md b/docs/modules/csvimport.md
index c9b3481e..c274430e 100644
--- a/docs/modules/csvimport.md
+++ b/docs/modules/csvimport.md
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ This will open a drawer on the right side of the browser window with the followi
- **Use multivalve separator:** check this box to use the multivalue separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator in the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic Settings tab.
- **Language:** is a field where you can set the language for this column using the [IETF Language tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in which the text is written. This will override what you have entered in basic settings.
-- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items/#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
+- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items.md#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
- Import as text (default).
- Import as URL reference. You can set the label for the URI by including the desired text after a space, for example: `http://example.com This Is The Label`
- Import as Omeka S resource ID. Note that you must have the correct ID for the resource. A resources' ID is the number sequence at the end of the url when on the view or edit page, so for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is 11576.
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ This will open a drawer on the right side of the browser window with the followi
- **Use multivalve separator:** check this box to use the multivalue separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator in the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic Settings tab.
- **Language:** is a field where you can set the language for this column using the [IETF Language tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in which the text is written. This will override what you have entered in basic settings.
-- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items/#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
+- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items.md#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
- Import as text (default).
- Import as URL reference. You can set the label for the URI by including the desired text after a space, for example: `http://example.com This Is The Label`
- Import as Omeka S resource ID. Note that you must have the correct ID for the resource. A resources' ID is the number sequence at the end of the url when on the view or edit page, so for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is 11576.
@@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ This will open a drawer on the right side of the browser window with the followi
- **Use multivalve separator:** check this box to use the multivalue separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator in the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic Settings tab.
- **Language:** is a field where you can set the language for this column using the [IETF Language tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in which the text is written. This will override what you have entered in basic settings.
-- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items/#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
+- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items.md#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
- Import as text (default).
- Import as URL reference. You can set the label for the URI by including the desired text after a space, for example: `http://example.com This Is The Label`
- Import as Omeka S resource ID. Note that you must have the correct ID for the resource. A resources' ID is the number sequence at the end of the url when on the view or edit page, so for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is 11576.
@@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ This will open a drawer on the right side of the browser window with the followi
- **Use multivalue separator:** check this box to use the multivalue separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator character in the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic Settings tab.
- **Language:** is a field where you can set the language for this column using the [IETF Language tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in which the text is written. This will override what you have entered in basic settings.
-- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items/#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
+- **Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which correspond to the [values](../content/items.md#values) one can use when adding properties to an item:
- Import as text (default);
- Import as URL reference. You can set the label for the URI by including the desired text after a space, for example: `http://example.com This Is The Label`
- Import as Omeka S resource ID. Note that you must have the correct ID for the resource. A resources' ID is the number sequence at the end of the url when on the view or edit page, so for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is 11576.
@@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ The drawer has a dropdown for Users info, with three options:
- *Email:* the email address for the user;
- *Display name:* the user's display name
-- *Role:* the user's [role](../admin/users/#roles-and-permissions) - for this column, use the role labels exactly as they appear in Omeka S.
+- *Role:* the user's [role](../admin/users.md#roles-and-permissions) - for this column, use the role labels exactly as they appear in Omeka S.
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ If you have [Mapping](../modules/mapping/) (minimum version 1.1.0) installed and
- *Default zoom* should be a number between 1 (most zoomed out) and 18 (most zoomed in)
### File Sideload
-If you have [File Sideload](../filesideload) (minimum version 1.2.0) installed and active, you can use it as a source for media when running a csv import.
+If you have [File Sideload](filesideload) (minimum version 1.2.0) installed and active, you can use it as a source for media when running a csv import.
Everything on the *Map to Omeka S data* tab will be the same. When you add a mapping and choose the "Media source" option, you will see that there is now an option for "Sideload"
@@ -715,6 +715,6 @@ Everything on the *Map to Omeka S data* tab will be the same. When you add a map
For the data in this column, you need to include the full file name, including extension. So, for example, if you want to import a jpg file which is named "Jekyll_and_Hyde_Title" then the data in the media column of the csv you are importing should be `Jekyll_and_Hyde_Title.jpg`.
### Numeric Data Types
-If you have [Numeric Data Types](modules/numericdatatypes/) installed and active, it will add the option to set a column data type as numeric data.
+If you have [Numeric Data Types](numericdatatypes) installed and active, it will add the option to set a column data type as numeric data.
diff --git a/docs/modules/itemcarouselblock.md b/docs/modules/itemcarouselblock.md
index 3a720b00..e4cb3d9d 100644
--- a/docs/modules/itemcarouselblock.md
+++ b/docs/modules/itemcarouselblock.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Attachments may be reordered by dragging and dropping.
## Basic Configuration
The block includes two basic configuration settings.
-
+
You may add a title for the carousel.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ You can select the number of items that appear on the page at one time. The bloc
## Advanced Options
Using the drop-down menu within the block, you can access a number of advance options to further configure the appearance of the block.
-
+
You can use those settings to:
diff --git a/docs/modules/mapping.md b/docs/modules/mapping.md
index 79d154b3..2d063ca3 100644
--- a/docs/modules/mapping.md
+++ b/docs/modules/mapping.md
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ You can now click on the marker to add a label which will display on [public map
-When you are adding a label, you can also add an image to display on the marker when clicked in the [public view](../modules/mapping/#public-view). You can only select from images which has already been [attached to the item as media](../content/items/#media). To remove the image, select "no Image" from the sidebar.
+When you are adding a label, you can also add an image to display on the marker when clicked in the [public view](#public-view). You can only select from images which has already been [attached to the item as media](../content/items.md#media). To remove the image, select "no Image" from the sidebar.
@@ -120,10 +120,10 @@ Within the preview map, there are five buttons:
### Timeline
-Timeline adds a timeline display to the left of the map view. Note that this feature requires the [NumericDataTypes](../modules/numericdatatypes/) module and at least one item that has a property with a Timestamp or Interval value (applied via the [resource template](../../content/resource-template/)).
+Timeline adds a timeline display to the left of the map view. Note that this feature requires the [NumericDataTypes](../modules/numericdatatypes/) module and at least one item that has a property with a Timestamp or Interval value (applied via the [resource template](../content/resource-template)).
-- *Title headline:* displays on the first slide of the timeline (see ["Timeline public view"](../../modules/mapping/#timeline-public-view) below). You can use this to name the timeline.
-- *Title text:* appears below the title headline on the first slide of the timeline (see ["Timeline public view"](../../modules/mapping/#timeline-public-view) below). You can use this to provide context or narrative introduction for the timeline.
+- *Title headline:* displays on the first slide of the timeline (see ["Timeline public view"](#timeline-public-view) below). You can use this to name the timeline.
+- *Title text:* appears below the title headline on the first slide of the timeline (see ["Timeline public view"](#timeline-public-view) below). You can use this to provide context or narrative introduction for the timeline.
- *Fly to:* is a dropdown menu where you can set the zoom level for each point in the timeline on the map. Your options are default view, or zoom levels 0-18 (even numbers only). The higher the number, the more zoomed in the map will be.
- Note that the transition between points is animated, so if you have very distant points the shift between them will involve a significant zoom out and in.
- *Show contemporaneous events:* sets how two events with the same timestamp or interval are displayed. If checked, contemporaneous events will both display in the map when active in the story slider.
diff --git a/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md b/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md
index 70678808..7e22b82f 100644
--- a/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md
+++ b/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ To remove a property simply click the trash can/delete icon to the right of the
Once you have selected properties for Metadata Browse, either in the configuration for the module or on at least one site, you will be able to search for exact matches to item and item set properties on the admin side.
-When viewing the metadata of any item (not when editing), you will be able to browse those properties as exact match for any other item in the installation with that value in that property. If the direct [direct link checkbox](#direct-links) is active, these properties will display as links; if not, they will display with the text "see all items with this value" just below the value for the property.
+When viewing the metadata of any item (not when editing), you will be able to browse those properties as exact match for any other item in the installation with that value in that property. If the direct [direct link checkbox](#direct-links-checkbox) is active, these properties will display as links; if not, they will display with the text "see all items with this value" just below the value for the property.
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Remember to click the *Save* button to save changes.
### Public View
Once you have selected properties and saved changes, visitors to your site can use the Metadata Browse properties to search for all items on the site with matching properties.
-The browse will either display with the property as a link or with the link text "see all items with this value", depending on whether the [direct link checkbox](#direct-links) in the global module configuration.
+The browse will either display with the property as a link or with the link text "see all items with this value", depending on whether the [direct link checkbox](#direct-links-checkbox) in the global module configuration.
In the example below, Metadata Browse is available for Title, Date of Publication, and Publisher, and Direct Links is not active.
diff --git a/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md b/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md
index 2b81cb80..dac3220a 100644
--- a/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md
+++ b/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Clicking on this dropdown will reveal multiple options, including all of the pro
## Bulk edit numeric data
-The module adds an additional option to the [item batch edit](../../content/items/#batch-editing): convert to numeric.
+The module adds an additional option to the [item batch edit](../content/items.md#batch-actions): convert to numeric.
 installation running on the same server as the Omeka S installation. Minimum MediaWiki version is 1.30.0.
-Create the MediaWiki installation on your server using [their instructions](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:FAQ#Installation_and_configuration). Install the Scripto module using the [documentation for installing modules](../../modules/#installing-modules).
+Create the MediaWiki installation on your server using [their instructions](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:FAQ#Installation_and_configuration). Install the Scripto module using the [documentation for installing modules](../index.md#installing-modules).
Once you have installed the module and created your MediaWiki installation, go to the Modules tab of your Omeka S installation and activate the Scripto module.
diff --git a/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md b/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md
index 5b6982a2..74a055a3 100644
--- a/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md
+++ b/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md
@@ -13,12 +13,12 @@ For an example of how to orient community members to the interface, see the [Gui
## Linking between Scripto and an Omeka S site
While the Scripto public interface exists somewhat separately from the sites you build in your Omeka S installation, it is possible to move between them.
-From your Omeka S sites, you can create direct links to your Scripto projects using the [custom link](../../../sites/site_navigation/#custom-link) in site Navigation or as a link in any [HTML page block text](../../../sites/site_pages/#html).
+From your Omeka S sites, you can create direct links to your Scripto projects using the [custom link](../../sites/site_navigation.md#add-a-custom-link) in site Navigation or as a link in any [HTML page block text](../../sites/site_pages.md#html).
### Scripto page block
-When you add the Scripto module, it creates a new [page block](../../../sites/site_pages/#page-blocks) called "Scripto"
+When you add the Scripto module, it creates a new [page block](../../sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks) called "Scripto"
-The Scripto page block offers a drop-down to let you select from all available Scripto [projects](../scriptoproject/). Select the project you want to link from the dropdown.
+The Scripto page block offers a drop-down to let you select from all available Scripto [projects](scriptoproject). Select the project you want to link from the dropdown.
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The list of watched pages displays the following information:
## Public project browse
On the upper right of the browser, near the "Log In" buttons or, when logged in, the user icon, is a link to browse all projects in the Scripto instance.
-This browse page shows the project title, a representative icon determined by the first item in the project, and the project's description (set in the [configuration options](../scriptoproject/#configuration-options)), if any.
+This browse page shows the project title, a representative icon determined by the first item in the project, and the project's description (set in the [configuration options](scriptoproject.md#configuration-options)), if any.
Clicking on any project's title or representative thumbnail takes you to the project's view.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Across the top of the page, just under the Scripto navigation options (project b
- a browse items links; and
- a search bar to search the items in the project (this is a full-text search for the metadata of the items and media).
-Below this is a table of the items in the project. The table will be labeled Items unless you selected from the Item type dropdown in the project's [configuration options](../scriptoproject/#configuration-options).
+Below this is a table of the items in the project. The table will be labeled Items unless you selected from the Item type dropdown in the project's [configuration options](scriptoproject.md#configuration-options).
The table has two display options. The default view is set in the project's configuration options.
diff --git a/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md b/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md
index 07f18b6d..ee5abda3 100644
--- a/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md
+++ b/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ If you select Media, the content created in Scripto will appear in the media met
- Translation
### Reviewers
-Add [Omeka S users](../../../admin/users/) to your Scripto project as reviewers, who can can access private projects, and mark media as approved and unapproved. You can manage users after adding a project (see below)
+Add [Omeka S users](../../admin/users) to your Scripto project as reviewers, who can can access private projects, and mark media as approved and unapproved. You can manage users after adding a project (see below)
Only Omeka users with **site administrator** and g**lobal administrator** roles can sync and import projects, due to the destructive potential of those actions.
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ The next section is **Review status**.
You can toggle the drawer open and closed using the open arrow `>` button in the middle of the divider between the drawer and the main work area.
-#### Media status:
+### Media status:
* **Complete:** Community users have the ability to mark a media they are working on as "complete." This serves as a flag to notify the project team that the media is ready for review. If a media is not completely transcribed/translated/described, adminstrators can reverse the Complete status.
* **Approved:** Approval is granted by administrators and indicates that every media is complete and satisfactory. Items can only be considered approved when all child media are approved.
diff --git a/docs/s-planning-tips.md b/docs/s-planning-tips.md
index 63406218..3dd55f49 100644
--- a/docs/s-planning-tips.md
+++ b/docs/s-planning-tips.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Planning Tips
-In Omeka S, you build your [sites](../sites) page by page, using already existing resources on your installation. While it is best to have some resources before you start building out the pages, you can begin planning your site before you create the first item or item set.
+In Omeka S, you build your [sites](sites/index) page by page, using already existing resources on your installation. While it is best to have some resources before you start building out the pages, you can begin planning your site before you create the first item or item set.
What follows are some questions and ideas to help guide you as you plan your sites in Omeka S.
@@ -13,25 +13,25 @@ What follows are some questions and ideas to help guide you as you plan your sit
## Resources
**What will you do with items in this website?**
-[Items](../content/items/) are the building blocks of Omeka S. What sort of [resource templates](../content/resource-template/) will you want to create and use to fully describe your items? Any item you include on an Omeka S will have a public item show page, so try to ensure that the information in an item's metadata can stand on its own.
+[Items](content/items) are the building blocks of Omeka S. What sort of [resource templates](content/resource-template) will you want to create and use to fully describe your items? Any item you include on an Omeka S will have a public item show page, so try to ensure that the information in an item's metadata can stand on its own.
**What will you do with item sets?**
-You can use [item sets](../content/item-sets) to group items to be included on a [site](../sites), and they can be a way to guide visitors' browsing on your sites. For some sites, item sets are robust resources themselves.
+You can use [item sets](content/item-sets) to group items to be included on a [site](sites/index), and they can be a way to guide visitors' browsing on your sites. For some sites, item sets are robust resources themselves.
How do you want to group items into sets? What metadata fields will your item sets use? Do your item sets have relations to each other or to items?
**What do you want your data to do?**
-What properties are you going to want to consistently describe in your site? Do you want some of these to display with a different label - for example 'author' instead of 'creator' for books? Use a [resource template](../content/resource-template/) and change the label of the property.
+What properties are you going to want to consistently describe in your site? Do you want some of these to display with a different label - for example 'author' instead of 'creator' for books? Use a [resource template](content/resource-template) and change the label of the property.
In Omeka S, items and item sets can use other resources - items, item sets, and media - as properties; for example, you can make an item for William Shakespeare and have that item fill the 'creator' property for a 'Hamlet' item. How can your resources use this functionality?
-Do you want to use a set of terms (controlled vocabulary) for certain items? You might want to use [Custom Vocab](../modules/customvocab/). Or do you want to use a terms list created by the Library of Congress or the Getty? Then you might use [Vocab Suggest](../modules/valuesuggest/).
+Do you want to use a set of terms (controlled vocabulary) for certain items? You might want to use [Custom Vocab](modules/customvocab). Or do you want to use a terms list created by the Library of Congress or the Getty? Then you might use [Vocab Suggest](modules/valuesuggest).
## Building a site
With Omeka S you will build your site from the ground up, which means you need to give some thought to how you want to organize your site.
What pages do you want to include? What kind of content do you want on these pages? How do you want to arrange them? Try sketching out a sample menu or wireframes for the site. Use that as a guide as you build your pages.
-Pages are made up of [blocks](../sites/site_pages/#page-blocks), which can include text, images, and much more. What kind of content do you want on the pages you build? Bear in mind that you can rearrange page blocks as you build, so you can play around with the order of the content on your pages if you need to.
+Pages are made up of [blocks](sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks), which can include text, images, and much more. What kind of content do you want on the pages you build? Bear in mind that you can rearrange page blocks as you build, so you can play around with the order of the content on your pages if you need to.
-How do you want to interact with your visitors on your site? Do you want to [collect](../modules/collecting/) resources from your visitors? Allow them to [share](../modules/sharing/) your content on social media?
+How do you want to interact with your visitors on your site? Do you want to [collect](modules/collecting) resources from your visitors? Allow them to [share](modules/sharing) your content on social media?
diff --git a/docs/search.md b/docs/search.md
index ce0b39b6..21c4cb2b 100644
--- a/docs/search.md
+++ b/docs/search.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ By default, this search operates on items in your installation. However, you can
### Item advanced search
-Advanced search for items only is available on the [Items](/content/items.md) page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of items.
+Advanced search for items only is available on the [Items](content/items) page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of items.
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ You can remove value and item set searches using the red trash can icon to the r
You can reset your search terms at any time by using the "Reset" button on the upper right next to the "Search" button.
## Media advanced search
-Advanced search for media is accessed from the [Media](/content/media) browse page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of item sets.
+Advanced search for media is accessed from the [Media](content/media) browse page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of item sets.
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ You can remove value searches using the red trash can icon to the right of the v
*Search by MIME type:* you can specify the media type for the search. For example, to find all tiff images, you would enter `image/tiff`.
-
+
Searches by value, class, and template allow you to search by more than one input - use the *add new* buttons to search with more than one value or item set. These search terms build - searching for two templates will return all media using either template.
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ You can reset your search terms at any time by using the "Reset" button on the u
Advanced search for item sets only is accessed on the [Item Sets](content/item-sets) page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of item sets.
-
+
The advanced search loads on a new page, and has the following options:
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Searches by value, class, and template allow you to search by more than one inpu
You can reset your search terms at any time by using the "Reset" button on the upper right next to the "Search" button.
## Public views
-The exact appearance of the search interface will vary based on the [theme](/sites/site_theme/) selected. However, the way search works should be consistent regardless of theme. All of the screenshots in this section are from a site using the the Default theme.
+The exact appearance of the search interface will vary based on the [theme](sites/site_theme) selected. However, the way search works should be consistent regardless of theme. All of the screenshots in this section are from a site using the the Default theme.
### Basic search
There is a search bar near the menu for each site. In the default theme, it is located just beneath the main menu, as shown in the image below.
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ If the [
### Advanced item search
Site visitors can access an advanced item search from the Browse Items page, if you have that page accessible. There is a link for Advanced search between the pagination and the sort options at the top of the item browse table.
-
+
Clicking this loads a new page with four options for search:
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Clicking this loads a new page with four options for search:
*Search by value:* search for a term or phrase using multiple options.
- The first selector allows you to specify a property to search.
- - Note that if you have have the [site settings](sites/site_settings/#search) to restrict search to templates, this will only display the properties used by those templates.
+ - Note that if you have have the [site settings](sites/site_settings.md#search) to restrict search to templates, this will only display the properties used by those templates.
- The second selector allows you to set the relationship the property has with the value. The options are:
- is exactly,
- is not exactly,
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ To find a resource ID, go to the resource and look at the url in your browser's
*Search by item set:* select from a dropdown of item sets.
-
+
Searches by value, class, and item set allow a visitor to search by more than one input; they can use the *add new* buttons to search with more than one search term. These search terms build - searching for two item sets will return all items in either item set, rather than only those items which are in both.
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Clicking the advanced search link loads a new page with three options for search
*Search by value:* search for a term or phrase using multiple options.
- The first selector allows you to specify a property to search.
- - Note that if you have have the [site settings](sites/site_settings/#search) to restrict search to templates, this will only display the properties used by those templates.
+ - Note that if you have have the [site settings](sites/site_settings.md#search) to restrict search to templates, this will only display the properties used by those templates.
- The second selector allows you to set the relationship the property has with the value. The options are:
- is exactly,
- is not exactly,
diff --git a/docs/sites/index.md b/docs/sites/index.md
index f5b854aa..f1481744 100644
--- a/docs/sites/index.md
+++ b/docs/sites/index.md
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ The Add New Site page has three tabs: Admin, Theme, and Item Pool.
### The Admin tab
* Give your site a *title* (required)
* create a *slug* for the site’s url. The url will be *installurl/site/slug*. This is optional - if you leave this field blank, Omeka S will create a slug based on the site title.
-* Create a *summary* for your site, a brief idea of what it is about which will appear on your installation's landing page and on [list of site blocks](../sites/site_pages/#page-blocks)
+* Create a *summary* for your site, a brief idea of what it is about which will appear on your installation's landing page and on [list of site blocks](site_pages.md#page-blocks)
diff --git a/docs/sites/site_navigation.md b/docs/sites/site_navigation.md
index 8324ec78..f5204c07 100644
--- a/docs/sites/site_navigation.md
+++ b/docs/sites/site_navigation.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ To change which page is used as the homepage, select a different page from the d
## Adding Navigation
-Add to the navigation of the site using the options on the right hand side of the page. There are two sections: [Add a custom link](../sites/site_navigation/#custom-link) and [Add a link to a site page](../sites/site_navigation/#site-page)
+Add to the navigation of the site using the options on the right hand side of the page. There are two sections: [Add a custom link](#add-a-custom-link) and [Add a link to a site page](#site-page)
### Add a custom link
To add a link you can use the *Add a custom link* options on the right hand drawer to add:
diff --git a/docs/sites/site_pages.md b/docs/sites/site_pages.md
index cc446022..5ab13274 100644
--- a/docs/sites/site_pages.md
+++ b/docs/sites/site_pages.md
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Some modules may create additional blocks for your site pages. For information o
### From the Public Side
If you are on the admin side and click "View" in the upper right-hand corner of a page, it will take you to the public view for that page.
-As you are browsing the public side of your site, you can edit the page you are viewing if you are currently logged in and the [user bar option is turned on in Site Settings](../sites/site_settings/#general-settings).
+As you are browsing the public side of your site, you can edit the page you are viewing if you are currently logged in and the [user bar option is turned on in Site Settings](site_settings.md#general-settings).
The user bar, which appears across the top of the page, includes a link to edit the current page - circled in red in the below image.
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ You can add multiple items to the list.
### Item with Metadata
This block displays an item along with all associated metadata (entered when creating or editing the [item](../content/items.md)).
-Add attachments in the same manner as the [media](../sites/site_pages/#media) page block.
+Add attachments in the same manner as the [media](#media-embed) page block.
diff --git a/docs/sites/site_settings.md b/docs/sites/site_settings.md
index 60e3ff2e..f361fbff 100644
--- a/docs/sites/site_settings.md
+++ b/docs/sites/site_settings.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The site info settings for an Omeka S site are where you can change the basic in
* *title* - a text field.
* *slug* - the url for your site.
-* *summary* - the brief description of what it is about which will appear on your installation's landing page and on [List of Site](../sites/site_pages/#page-blocks) blocks.
+* *summary* - the brief description of what it is about which will appear on your installation's landing page and on [List of Site](site_pages.md#page-blocks) blocks.
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ To implement any changes you make, click Save at the top right of the browser wi
**Auto-assign new items** A checkbox which sets whether new items are automatically added to the site. If checked, every new item will be added to the site, regardless of the item's owner. Note that item owners may unassign their items from the site at any time, in the item's edit pages.
-**Attachment link type** Sets the target of links from attachments you add to [site page blocks](../sites/site_pages/#page-blocks) (for example, in an [item showcase](../sites/site_pages/#item-showcase). It offers a dropdown with the following options:
+**Attachment link type** Sets the target of links from attachments you add to [site page blocks](site_pages.md#page-blocks) (for example, in an [item showcase](site_pages.md#item-showcase). It offers a dropdown with the following options:
- *item page:* clicking on the attachment takes users to the item page associated with the attached media;
- *media page:* clicking on the attachment takes users to the media page;
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ When users are logged in, the user bar has the following options:
- Installation Title: takes you back to the installation admin
- Site Title: takes you back to the landing page for managing the site (site/show).
-- Resource view: depending on what you are viewing, this is a link to the admin side management for [Pages](../site/site_pages), [Items](../content/items), or [Item Sets](../content/item-sets)
+- Resource view: depending on what you are viewing, this is a link to the admin side management for [Pages](site_pages), [Items](../content/items), or [Item Sets](../content/item-sets)
- Edit link for that page, item set, or item.
- User's display name: takes you to your user page.
- Logout: logs out current user.
diff --git a/docs/sites/site_theme.md b/docs/sites/site_theme.md
index c4d22c76..9142595e 100644
--- a/docs/sites/site_theme.md
+++ b/docs/sites/site_theme.md
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Settings not described above:
* **Navigation layouts:** Global navigation can display as a **horizontal top bar with optional dropdown menus** or a **left vertical column**.
* **Show Top Navigation Child Pages:** Toggle display of child pages within the main navigation. If unchecked, only the top-level navigation will display.
* **Layout for Show Pages:** Resource metadata can show display as **stacked** with properties as headings above their values, or **inline** with properties as headings inline with their values.
-* **Truncate Body Property:** Set how much of the [browse body property]( ) displays on the browse page. You can:
+* **Truncate Body Property:** Set how much of the browse body property displays on the browse page. You can:
* **Show full value** which displays all of the property text.
* **Show 4 lines and fade out** which displays 4 lines of text with a fade at the end of the text block.
* **Show 4 lines and ellipses** which displays 4 lines of text concluding with an ellipses (...)
diff --git a/index.rst b/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1584db93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+=====================
+ Omeka S User Manual
+=====================
+
+Omeka S is a web publication system for universities, galleries, libraries,
+archives, and museums. It creates a local network of independently curated
+exhibits sharing a collaboratively built pool of items and their metadata.
+
+The sections of this manual correspond to the navigation sections on the
+left-hand side of the :doc:`administrative dashboard `.
+of an Omeka S Installation:
+
+Sites
+ Creating, editing, and managing sites, the public-facing parts of an Omeka S
+ installation.
+
+Resources
+ Creating, editing, and managing the content of an installation: items, item
+ sets, media, vocabularies, and resource templates.
+
+Admin
+ Access to functionality in the admin section varies by user role, but can
+ include: users, jobs, and settings.
+
+Modules
+ This section opens with basic information on managing the modules which
+ extend the functionality of your Omeka S installation and sites. It then
+ offers specific documentaiton for Omeka S modules created by RRCHNM, listed
+ in alphabetial order.
+
+This manual also includes a :doc:`glossary `, instructions on
+conducting :doc:`searches `, and how to turn on :doc:`error
+logging `.
+
+Screencasts to supplement the documentation are linked from relevant pages, and
+can be browsed in the `Omeka S collection on Vimeo
+`_.
+
+This documentation is CC-BY-NC
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+
+ docs/accessibility
+ docs/s-planning-tips
+ docs/install
+ docs/admin-dashboard
+ docs/glossary
+ docs/search
+ docs/frontpage
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+ :caption: Sites
+
+ docs/sites/index
+ docs/sites/site_settings
+ docs/sites/site_pages
+ docs/sites/site_navigation
+ docs/sites/site_resources
+ docs/sites/site_users
+ docs/sites/site_theme
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+ :caption: Resources
+
+ docs/content/items
+ docs/content/item-sets
+ docs/content/media
+ docs/content/vocabularies
+ docs/content/resource-template
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+ :caption: Admin
+
+ docs/admin/users
+ docs/admin/jobs
+ docs/admin/settings
+ docs/admin/assets
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+ :glob:
+ :caption: Modules
+
+ docs/modules/index
+ docs/modules/*
+
+.. toctree::
+ :hidden:
+ :caption: Miscellaneous
+
+ docs/errorLogging
+ docs/translateOmekaS
+ docs/configuration
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/accessibility.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/accessibility.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dd78c3ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/accessibility.po
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:2
+msgid "Accessibility Statement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:4
+msgid ""
+"The Omeka team is committed to making Omeka S an accessible option for "
+"building collections and exhibits online. We are working to make the core"
+" code accessible and will continue to make accessibility for persons with"
+" disabilities a priority as we develop the code. Omeka strives to adhere "
+"to `W3C web design standards `_ and to be "
+"compliant with `Section 508 `_ of the "
+"Americans with Disabilities Act (pdf)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:12
+msgid "For more information, please review the following reports:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:14
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S version 3.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report, using "
+"VPAT 2.4 Revised International Standards ` (pdf),"
+" October 2020."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:15
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S version 2.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report using "
+"VPAT version 2.0 ` (pdf), August 2019."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:16
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S version 1.x :download:`Accessibility Conformance Report using "
+"VPAT version 1.1 ` (pdf), April 2018."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:18
+msgid "The following statements apply to Omeka S version 1.0.1 and higher:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:21
+msgid "Front End (Public view)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:23
+msgid ""
+"The themes produced for Omeka S by RRCHNM have has the following features"
+" to improve accessibility:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:25
+msgid ""
+"`ARIA `_ (Accessible Rich Internet "
+"Applications) landmarks for tabbing through page content, when not using "
+"a mouse or using a screen reader;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:26 ../../docs/accessibility.rst:36
+msgid "Semantic HTML5 markup."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:28
+msgid ""
+"Please note that although the core code for Omeka S conform to the above "
+"standards, installations of Omeka S which have been customized or which "
+"are using non-RRCHNM modules and themes may lack some or all of these "
+"options. While we encourage developers to consider accessibility, we "
+"cannot guarantee that their code includes ARIA Landmarks, SkipNav, or "
+"other accessibility considerations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:31
+msgid "Back End (Administrative view)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:33
+msgid ""
+"The administrative dashboard of Omeka S has the following features for "
+"accessibility:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/accessibility.rst:35
+msgid ""
+"ARIA landmarks for screen readers on the Admin Dashboard, designating the"
+" header, navigation, main content, and footers."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin-dashboard.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin-dashboard.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4815234a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin-dashboard.po
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:1
+msgid "Admin Dashboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The administrative dashboard manages the content shared by all OmekaS "
+"sites and the core functionalities of the OmekaS installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:5
+msgid ""
+"This [screencast](https://vimeo.com/455708039) walks you through the main"
+" features of the dashboard and navigating your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:7
+msgid ""
+"[![Still image of the first frame of a vimeo video](files"
+"/navigatingOmekaS-still.png)](https://vimeo.com/455708039)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:9
+msgid "Admin Main Page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:11
+msgid "When a user logs in, the first page they see is the Admin Dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:13
+msgid ""
+"*Note: depending on the user role, you may not see precisely the same "
+"options in the left-hand navigation. See [below](#left-hand-navigation) "
+"for details*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:15
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:17
+msgid ""
+"In addition to the left-hand navigation present on all pages (see below),"
+" the admin dashboard presents users with two boxes: Manage Resources and "
+"Manage Sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:19
+msgid ""
+"The *Manage Resources* box displays the following resources with their "
+"total count: [Items](content/items.md), [Item Sets](content/item-"
+"sets.md), [Vocabularies](content/vocabularies.md), and [Resource "
+"Templates](content/resource-template.md). Clicking on the label of the "
+"Resource will take you to the browse page; clicking the Plus button to "
+"the right of the label will take you to the add page for that resource "
+"type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:23
+msgid ""
+"The *Manage Sites* box lists the [Sites](sites/index.md) on the install. "
+"Clicking on the site name will take you to the public view of the site; "
+"clicking the edit (pencil) button will take you to the Edit Site Info "
+"page for that site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:26
+msgid "Left-hand navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:28
+msgid ""
+"The following content appears on the left side of the admin dashboard and"
+" on all administrative pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:30
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:32
+msgid ""
+"In the upper left corner of the screen is a link displaying the title of "
+"the installation which will always take you back to the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Directly below the installation title is the message “Signed in as "
+"*User*” where *User* is the display name of the person logged in. Near "
+"the username (below or to the right, depending on window width) is the "
+"button to *Logout*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Underneath the user information is a search field which has an option for"
+" advanced search (ellipses) in addition to the button to search "
+"(magnifying glass). Use this to search all items in the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:38
+msgid ""
+"Advanced search options (the ellipses) allow you to refine the search by "
+"Resource Type, limiting it to *Items*, *Item Sets*, or *Media* by "
+"clicking the radio button next to the Resource Type you want to search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:40
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:42
+msgid ""
+"The left hand navigation of the dashboard is divided into sections "
+"related to function and user access:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:44
+msgid ""
+"[Sites](sites/index.md): lists and provides access to all of the sites on"
+" the OmekaS install. (Computer icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:45
+msgid "Resources: content creation and metadata management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:46
+msgid ""
+"[Items](content/items.md): manage the individual resources of your "
+"install. (Box icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:47
+msgid ""
+"[Item Sets](content/item-sets.md): manage aggregated groups of items. "
+"(Multiple boxes icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:48
+msgid ""
+"[Vocabularies](content/vocabularies.md): manage the metadata standards "
+"for your install. (Closed book icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:49
+msgid ""
+"[Resource Templates](content/resource-template.md): manage predefined "
+"sets of properties (fields) to use when creating items. (Pencil in a "
+"square icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:50
+msgid ""
+"Admin: installation-level administration (note that some of these tabs "
+"may not be visible to all user levels)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:51
+msgid ""
+"[Users](admin/users.md): manage users for the whole install and "
+"individual sites. (head and shoulders person icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:52
+msgid ""
+"[Modules](modules/index.md): add functionality to your sites. (Plus sign "
+"in square icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:53
+msgid ""
+"[Jobs](admin/jobs.md): displays the user-activated tasks which are "
+"currently running. NB: jobs only display when they are running. (Three "
+"bars icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:54
+msgid ""
+"[Settings](admin/settings.md): manage the global settings for all sites, "
+"the admin dashboard and the site dashboards. (Gears icon)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:56
+msgid ""
+"If you have installed modules, they may appear in the admin section of "
+"the left navigation below settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:58
+msgid ""
+"Note that users with more limited permissions will see only some of these"
+" navigation options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:60
+msgid "System Information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:62
+msgid ""
+"In the bottom right corner is a short display of the current version of "
+"Omeka S. Click the link labelled *System Information* to see a full page "
+"with details."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin-dashboard.md:64
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/jobs.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/jobs.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0294a748
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/jobs.po
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:1
+msgid "Jobs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:3
+msgid ""
+"When a user starts running a process which will take some time, such as "
+"an API import, the progress of the process is displayed in the *Jobs* tab"
+" of the admin dashboard. The table also displays completed, stopped, and"
+" error-interrupted jobs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:5
+msgid ""
+"The Jobs table shows a job’s *ID* number, *class* of job, *Status* and "
+"the *Owner*, or user who started the job."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:7
+msgid ""
+"You can order the rows of the table by ID, Class, Status, or Owner "
+"(descending or ascending) using the drop-down menus just above the table "
+"on the upper right."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:9
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:11
+msgid "To see the details of a job, click on its id number."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:13
+msgid "On a job’s details page, you will see the following information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:15
+msgid "*Status* (In Progress, Error, Completed, Stopped)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:16
+msgid "*Started* and *Ended* (date stamps)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:17
+msgid "*Class* (source of the job, for example `DspaceConnector\\Job\\Import`)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:18
+msgid "*Owner*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:19
+msgid "*Args*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:20
+msgid "*Log* - click on *view log* to see any error or other messages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/jobs.md:22
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/settings.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/settings.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf08d57f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/settings.po
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:1
+msgid "Manage Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Admin users may change the settings for the admin dashboard and general "
+"settings for sites using the *Settings* tab on the left side of the admin"
+" dashboard (gear icon)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:5
+msgid "Global Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Global settings are only available to users with Site Administrator or "
+"Global Administrator user roles."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:9
+msgid ""
+"The settings are as follows divided into two sections: General and "
+"Security settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:11
+msgid "General"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:13
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:15
+msgid ""
+"*Administrator Email* sets the email address for the installation "
+"administrator. Note that some hosting setups may require that the domain"
+" name for the administrator email match the domain name of the "
+"installation (if your domain is yourinstall.org, the administrator email "
+"must be user@yourinstall.org)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:18
+msgid ""
+"*Installation Title* allows you to change the title for the OmekaS "
+"installation overall. This is what appears in the upper left-hand corner "
+"of the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:20
+msgid ""
+"*Time Zone* sets the default time zone for the install, which will be "
+"used for error logging messages and to determine creation dates for "
+"items, item sets, and other materials on the install. This is a dropdown "
+"menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:22
+msgid ""
+"*Results per page* changes the number of results (items, item sets, "
+"media) displayed per page when browsing in either public or admin sides "
+"of the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:24
+msgid ""
+"*Property label information* determines what is displayed next to each "
+"property when users are editing items and item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:26
+msgid ""
+"By default, this is set to *none*, meaning that only the property label "
+"is displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:27
+msgid ""
+"If *show vocabulary* is selected, the parenthetical statement next to the"
+" property name displays the vocabulary used (for example, Dublin Core)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:28
+msgid ""
+"If *show term* is selected, the parenthetical statement next to the "
+"property name displays the vocabulary:term (for example, dc:title)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:30
+msgid ""
+"*Default Site* dropdown gives you control over where people land when "
+"they navigate to the base url of your install. You can either display a "
+"list of all sites in the install (default) or select a specific site from"
+" the dropdown, to which people will be redirected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:32
+msgid ""
+"*Locale* dropdown lets you select from a dropdown of [available "
+"languages](https://www.transifex.com/omeka/omeka-s/) for the Omeka S core"
+" to change the language in which your installation's admin side displays."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:34
+msgid ""
+"*Enable version notifications* check this box to enable notifications for"
+" new versions of Omeka S, themes, and modules."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:36
+msgid ""
+"*Disable JSON-LD embed* By default, Omeka embeds JSON-LD in resource "
+"browse and show pages for the purpose of machine-readable metadata "
+"discovery. Check this to disable embedding."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:38
+msgid ""
+"*Default content visibility to private* When this box is checked, all new"
+" items, item sets, and sites will have their visibility set to Private. "
+"If this box is not checked, the default is public."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:40
+msgid ""
+"*Index full-text search* Check this box to run an index of your "
+"installation's resources and sites as soon as you click Save. You should "
+"only need to run this process if you are having issues with search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:42
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:44
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:46
+msgid ""
+"*Use HTMLPurifier* checkbox. If checked, the service "
+"[HTMLPurifier](http://htmlpurifier.org/) will clean up any user-entered "
+"HTML."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:47
+msgid ""
+"*Disable file validation*: a checkbox, unchecked by default. When "
+"unchecked, file uploads are limited by the following two fields. When "
+"this box is checked, any type of media or MIME type can be uploaded."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:48
+msgid ""
+"*Allowed media types*: The default list contains the most common media "
+"types. Only files with media types included in this list may be uploaded "
+"to the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:49 ../../docs/admin/settings.md:52
+msgid "Separate additions to the list with a comma."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:50
+msgid "To return to defaults, click the *restore default media types* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:51
+msgid ""
+"*Allowed file extensions*: The default list contains common file "
+"extensions. Only files with extensions included in this list may be "
+"uploaded to the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:53
+msgid "To return to defaults, click the *restore default extensions* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:55
+msgid ""
+"The final two fields relate to setting up "
+"[reCAPTCHA](https://www.google.com/recaptcha/intro/index.html) for your "
+"site. You will need both a site key and a secret key. Enter them in the "
+"corresponding fields after [signing "
+"up](https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#list) with reCAPTCHA/Google:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:56
+msgid ""
+"*reCAPTCHA site key* enables to display of the widget on your install's "
+"sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/settings.md:57
+msgid ""
+"*reCAPTCHA secret key* allows communication between your install and "
+"reCAPTCHA's server."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/users.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/users.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a79a923c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/admin/users.po
@@ -0,0 +1,537 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:1
+msgid "Users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Only site and global administrators can create, edit, and delete users. "
+"Editors, Reviewers, Authors, and Researchers can edit their own user "
+"information but cannot change the information of other users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Administrators manage and create users from the User tab of the main "
+"administrative dashboard (head and shoulders icon)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:7
+msgid ""
+"This Users section displays the user’s email followed by full name in "
+"parentheses, as well as their role and the date the account was created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:9
+msgid "There are six user roles in Omeka S:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:11
+msgid "Global Admin: full installation privileges"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:12
+msgid "Supervisor: robust site and content privileges"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:13
+msgid "Editor (Content Expert): full privileges for content creation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:14
+msgid "Reviewer: robust content privileges but can only delete own content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:15
+msgid "Author: Create own content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:16
+msgid "Researcher: Search and read privileges only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:19
+msgid "Create a New User"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:20
+msgid ""
+"To create a new user, select the *Add new user* button in the upper right"
+" hand corner of the Users section in the main administrative dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:22
+msgid "On the Add User page, enter the following:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:24
+msgid "*Name* (full name or credit name)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:25
+msgid "*Email address*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:26
+msgid ""
+"Select a *Role* using the dropdown menu (see above for user role "
+"privileges)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:27
+msgid "Check the *Is Active* box to confirm that the user is active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:29
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:31
+msgid "Managing Users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:32
+msgid "To manage an existing user, go to the Users section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:34
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:36
+msgid "To view the name, email, and role of a user, click on the username."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:38
+msgid ""
+"To see the items and item sets owned by a user, click the *more* "
+"(ellipses) button located between the *delete* (trash can) button and the"
+" user role label. This will open a drawer on the right side of the screen"
+" with this information; you can click on the number of items or item sets"
+" to go to the items or item sets created by that user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:40
+msgid "Edit User"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:42
+msgid ""
+"To edit a user’s information, change their password, or access API keys, "
+"go to the Users section. Find the user on the table and click the edit "
+"icon (pencil) on their row in the table."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:44
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:46
+msgid ""
+"The Edit User page has four tabs: *User Information*, *User Settings*, "
+"*Password*, and *API Keys*. After making changes on any of these tabs, be"
+" sure to click the save button in the upper right hand corner of the "
+"browser window. At any time you may cancel your edits by clicking the "
+"cancel button next to the save button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:48
+msgid "User information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:49
+msgid ""
+"On this tab, you can edit the display *Name* and *Email* for the user, "
+"select or change the user *Role* and click the checkbox to confirm that "
+"the user *Is Active* (or uncheck the checkbox to render the user "
+"inactive)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:51
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:53
+msgid "User settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:54
+msgid "This tab allows a user or global admin to set the following:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:56
+msgid ""
+"*Locale*: select from a dropdown of available languages. This will change"
+" the language in which the installation's admin site displays for that "
+"user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:57
+msgid ""
+"*Default resource template*: select from existing templates to have a "
+"template auto-load whenever the user creates a new item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:59
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:61
+msgid "Password"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:62
+msgid ""
+"On this tab, create a new password. It must be entered twice, in both the"
+" *new password* and *confirm new password* fields to take."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:64
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:66
+msgid ""
+"To see the password requirements, click the arrow next to the New "
+"Password field. This will display a list of "
+"[requirements](../configuration) if any have been configured."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:68
+msgid "API Key"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:69
+msgid ""
+"Use this tab to generate an API key for the user. You must provide a "
+"label for the key - this could be a date or the purpose of the key. Click"
+" save to generate the key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:71
+msgid ""
+"To remove existing API keys, check the *Delete?* box on the row for that "
+"key and click save."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:73
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:75
+msgid "Batch edit users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:77
+msgid ""
+"You can edit multiple users at one time by using the checkboxes to the "
+"left of each user's email in the User table."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:79
+msgid "Click the checkboxes to select the users you want to edit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:81
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:83
+msgid ""
+"Then, using the dropdown just above the table, select from the following "
+"options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:85
+msgid "Edit selected (users)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:86
+msgid "Edit all (users)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:87
+msgid "Delete selected (users)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:88
+msgid "Delete all (users)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:90
+msgid ""
+"To edit only the users whose checkboxes you have ticked, choose \"Edit "
+"selected\" from the dropdown and then click \"Go\". You will be directed "
+"to the Batch Edit Users page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:92
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:94
+msgid ""
+"On the right hand side of the page are the emails for the users you are "
+"editing and to whom any changes you make will be applied."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:96
+msgid "On this page you can:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:98
+msgid ""
+"Set role: select from a dropdown of all roles (see below) to change the "
+"role for all selected users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:99
+msgid "Set activity: set selected users as active, not active, or no change."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:100
+msgid ""
+"Remove from site permissions: select from a dropdown menu of the sites on"
+" the Omeka S install, or use the option \"all sites\" to remove the "
+"selected users from all sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:101
+msgid ""
+"Add to site permissions: select from a dropdown menu of the sites on the "
+"Omeka S install, or use the option \"all sites\" to add the selected "
+"users to all sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:102
+msgid ""
+"Add to site permission as: a dropdown with options for viewer, editor, or"
+" admin - select which role the users will have on the sites to which you "
+"have added them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:104
+msgid "Once you are done, click save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:106
+msgid ""
+"If you choose \"Edit all\" rather than \"edit selected\" you can apply "
+"changes to all users - excluding yourself - on the Omeka S installation. "
+"Use this feature carefully!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:108
+msgid "Delete a User"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:109
+msgid ""
+"On the User page of the administrative dashboard, click the trash can "
+"icon in the user’s row, to the left of their role information, to delete "
+"the user. Confirm the deletion in the dialog box which will appear on the"
+" right of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:111
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:113
+msgid "Batch delete users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:114
+msgid ""
+"To delete a number of users at once, click the checkboxes next to their "
+"names on the Users table (see Batch edit users, above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:116
+msgid ""
+"From the dropdown menu just above the email column, select \"delete "
+"selected\" and click Go."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:118
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:120
+msgid ""
+"This will open a drawer on the right side of the screen with a message "
+"telling you the number of users you are about to delete. This action "
+"*cannot be undone.* To permanently delete these users, click the red "
+"Confirm Delete button. To cancel, click the x in the upper right corner "
+"of the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:122
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:124
+msgid ""
+"The \"delete all\" action in the dropdown will delete all users excluding"
+" yourself. This action *cannot be undone* and should be used with extreme"
+" caution."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:126
+msgid ""
+"To permanently delete these users, you must check the \"Are you sure\" "
+"box before clicking the \"Confirm Delete\" button. To cancel, click the x"
+" in the upper right corner of the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:128
+msgid "Roles and Permissions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:129
+msgid "The following is a detailed breakdown of permissions for each user role:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:131
+msgid "**Global Admin**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:133 ../../docs/admin/users.md:139
+msgid ""
+"Full privileges (create, edit, delete) of item, item sets, media, "
+"resource templates, site pages, sites, and users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:134
+msgid "Full privileges for modules - install, activate, configure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:135
+msgid "Search, read, create, and delete privileges for Vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:137
+msgid "**Supervisor**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:140
+msgid ""
+"Browse-only privileges for modules in the module tab. Can interact with "
+"active modules where appropriate."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:141
+msgid "Search, read, and create privileges for Vocabularies (cannot delete)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:143
+msgid "**Editor**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:145
+msgid ""
+"Full privileges (create, edit, delete) of item, item sets, media, "
+"resource templates, and site pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:146
+msgid ""
+"Can search, read, and create sites and users, and edit or delete sites "
+"they own. Can only delete their own user profile."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:147
+msgid "Search and read only privileges for vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:148 ../../docs/admin/users.md:155
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:162 ../../docs/admin/users.md:167
+msgid "No privileges for modules"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:150
+msgid "**Reviewer**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:152
+msgid ""
+"Can search, read, create, and edit all items, item sets, and media. Can "
+"only delete those items, item sets, and media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:153 ../../docs/admin/users.md:160
+msgid ""
+"Can be added to a site at the Creator or Manager levels, which enables "
+"them to search, read, create, edit, and delete site pages. If a Reviewer "
+"has not beed added as a site user, they will have read-only access to "
+"that site's content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:154
+msgid "Search and read only privileges for vocabularies and resource templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:157
+msgid "**Author**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:159
+msgid ""
+"Can search, read, and create items, item sets, and media. Can only edit "
+"or delete content which the user has created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:161
+msgid "Search and read only privileges for vocabularies and sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:164
+msgid "**Researcher**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/admin/users.md:166
+msgid "Search and read-only privileges for all content, sites, and users."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/configuration.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/configuration.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..07f03ff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/configuration.po
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:1
+msgid "Configuration Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The following are commonly requested options which can be configured in "
+"the file `local.config.php` located in the config directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:5
+msgid ""
+"For a full list of available configuration keys, please see the "
+"[developer documentation page on configuration "
+"settings](https://omeka.org/s/docs/developer/configuration/)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:7
+msgid "Password settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:8
+msgid ""
+"You can change the requirements for user passwords in the config file. "
+"Options include minimum length, number of upper and lowercase letters, "
+"and setting allowed symbols."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:20
+msgid "Requirements will display on the user creation and edit pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:22
+msgid "Thumbnails"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:24
+msgid "The `thumbnails` configuration key holds most thumbnail settings:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:39
+msgid ""
+"Under `types`, set the maximum dimensions for derivative images for media"
+" files. There are separate options for large, medium, and square. "
+"Defaults for these are 800, 200, and 200 respectively (all sizes are "
+"pixels)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:43
+msgid ""
+"`thumbnailer_options` is an array of options passed to the specific "
+"thumbnailer in use. For example, the `imagemagick_dir` thumbnail option "
+"sets the path to the folder where ImageMagick's `convert` command can be "
+"found on the server. This can be useful if Omeka S can't auto-detect the "
+"correct path for ImageMagick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:48
+msgid ""
+"The thumbnailer to use is set under the `service_manager` key, by setting"
+" the alias for `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer`:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:59
+msgid ""
+"The default thubnailer is `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\ImageMagick`. Also "
+"available are `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\Imagick` (which uses the "
+"`imagick` PHP extension) and `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\Gd` (which uses "
+"the commonly available `gd` PHP extension)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:64
+msgid ""
+"You can also set the thumbnailer to "
+"`Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\NoThumbnail`, which will prevent your Omeka S "
+"installation from generating thumbnails."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:67
+msgid "PHP Path"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:69
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S uses background jobs for some long-running tasks that operate on "
+"many items or just otherwise might take a long time. Omeka S uses the PHP"
+" CLI (command-line interface) to run these jobs, the `php` command."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:73
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S by default will try to automatically detect the path to the PHP "
+"CLI on the server, but for some servers this detection doesn't work, or "
+"there are multiple different `php` commands to choose from. In these "
+"situations you can manually configure the correct path in the "
+"configuration file:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:84
+msgid ""
+"(Note: the path here is just an example; the proper path will be specific"
+" to your server)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:87
+msgid "Mail"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:89
+msgid "The `mail` key can be used to configure how Omeka S sends emails."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:91
+msgid ""
+"The default is to use sendmail, where the server is responsible for "
+"having mail delivery configured and set up. Sendmail generally requires "
+"no configuration on the Omeka S side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/configuration.md:95
+msgid ""
+"Another option for some servers is to configure a direct SMTP connection "
+"for sending mail. An example configuration, to be added at the end of "
+"`local.config.php` follows (see the [laminas-mail "
+"docs](https://docs.laminas.dev/laminas-mail/transport/smtp-options/) for "
+"clarification):"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/item-sets.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/item-sets.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..784e67d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/item-sets.po
@@ -0,0 +1,663 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:1
+msgid "Item Sets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Item sets are an aggregation of *items*, similar to collections in "
+"previous versions of Omeka. In Omeka S, items may belong to any number of"
+" sets, and an item set can have any number of items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Item sets are managed via the *Item Sets* tab (stacked boxes) located in "
+"the left navigation of the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:7
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:9
+msgid "After clicking on the tab, a table appears listing all item sets with:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:11
+msgid "their *Title*;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:12
+msgid ""
+"icons for each row representing options to *edit* (pencil), *delete* "
+"(trash can), or *view details* (ellipses);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:13
+msgid "the item set’s *Class*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:14
+msgid "the *Owner* of the set,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:15
+msgid "and the date the set was *Created*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:17
+msgid ""
+"Above this table on the left is the pagination for the item sets table, "
+"where you can click the left and right arrows to move forward and back or"
+" enter a page number to go a specific page of item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:19
+msgid "In the center above the table is the button for *advanced search*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:21
+msgid ""
+"On the right above the table are drop-down menus to re-order the table by"
+" *title, class, owner,* or *date created* in either *ascending* or "
+"*descending* order."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:23
+msgid "In the upper right corner is the button to *Add new item set*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:26
+msgid "View Item Set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:28
+msgid ""
+"To quickly see information about an item set, click on the *view details*"
+" button (ellipses) for the item set on the item sets browse page. This "
+"will open a drawer on the right hand side of the page with the item set’s"
+" Title, Visibility, and number of Items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:30
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:32
+msgid ""
+"To view all the information for an item set, click on its name. On the "
+"item sets view page, there are tabs to see an item set’s *Metadata* and "
+"*Linked Resources*. On the right side of the item set’s view page is "
+"information about the date created, owner, and visibility. For item sets,"
+" visibility includes both whether the set is private or public and "
+"whether other users can add items to the set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:34
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:36
+msgid "The item set’s *metadata* is entered by users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:38
+msgid ""
+"*Linked resources* are items which have used the item set to populate "
+"specific metadata properties. When viewing linked resources, the table "
+"includes the predicate (property or description) and the object (linked "
+"item resource). Note that incoming resources (those used as properties "
+"for the item set being viewed) will *not* display here, as they already "
+"display in the item set's metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:40
+msgid ""
+"To view the items in a set, either click on the number of items in the "
+"set on the item set browse page, or click the *view items* button in the "
+"upper right corner of the individual item set page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:43
+msgid "Add an item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:45
+msgid ""
+"To add a new item set, click the Item Sets tab from the left navigation "
+"of the dashboard. Click the *add new item set* button on the right hand "
+"side of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:47
+msgid ""
+"Item sets may use the same resource templates available for items to "
+"provide pre-selected fields. Each set should contain at least one "
+"descriptive value, such as Dublin Core Description."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:49 ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:97
+msgid ""
+"You may add other fields by selecting a property from the list on the "
+"right. Browse fields by vocabulary (Dublin Core, Bibliographic Ontology, "
+"etc), or search in the *filter properties* bar above the list of "
+"properties and vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:51
+msgid "Values tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:52
+msgid ""
+"You may add text, a resource from the installation, or an external link "
+"in each field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:54
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:56
+msgid ""
+"By default, a new Item Set will load with the properties dcterms:Title "
+"and dcterms:description. You may add other fields by selecting a property"
+" from the list on the right. Browse fields by vocabulary (Dublin Core, "
+"Bibliographic Ontology, etc), or search in the *filter properties* bar "
+"above the list of properties and vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:58
+msgid ""
+"You can set individual properties as Private or Publicly visible using "
+"the eye icon for each property. Note that properties set to private are "
+"still visible to Global Admins, Site Admins, and Editors will be able to "
+"see properties even when set to private. Authors will be able to see all "
+"properties on items they own, but will not see private properties created"
+" by other users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:60
+msgid ""
+"In the image below, the first property (Title) is public as indicated by "
+"the open eye icon. The second property (Description) is private as "
+"indicated by the slashed-through eye icon. Clicking or hitting enter on "
+"the eye icon toggles between public and private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:62
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:64
+msgid "Text"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:65
+msgid ""
+"Text fields are entered with text. The keyboard at the top of the field "
+"input indicates text. You can indicate the language for the content of an"
+" input using the globe symbol above the input (see the red arrow in the "
+"image below). Click on the globe to activate a text field, then enter the"
+" [ISO 639-1](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes) code "
+"for the language in which the text is written."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:67
+msgid "Omeka Resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:68
+msgid ""
+"These fields create an internal link between the resource you are "
+"creating and the resource which fills that field. You have the option to "
+"use either another item or an item set. Once you select an item or item "
+"set, detailed information will load, and you must click *select resource*"
+" to finish linking the resources. You can also click the *X* button in "
+"the upper right-hand corner to go back to the list of items or item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:70
+msgid ""
+"When creating an item set, you have the option to use either another item"
+" or an item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:72
+msgid ""
+"Choosing a resource type will open a side drawer where you can browse all"
+" of those resources in the installation. You can use the search function "
+"at the top of the drawer to narrow down the list or to quickly find a "
+"specific item or item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:74
+msgid ""
+"Once you select an item or item set, detailed information will load, and "
+"you must click *select resource* to finish linking the resources. You can"
+" also click the *X* button in the upper right-hand corner to go back to "
+"the list of items or item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:76
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:78
+msgid ""
+"If you are using an Item resource for the property, you will have "
+"additional options for finding the item you want in the drawer. Open "
+"these options by clicking the triangle button next to the phrase \"Filter"
+" search\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:80
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:82
+msgid ""
+"This will open a menu below the button with the following options to "
+"filter the items in the drawer:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:84
+msgid ""
+"Filter by class: a dropdown where you can select any class provided by "
+"the vocabularies on the installation;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:85
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item set: a dropdown where you can limit the items displayed in"
+" the drawer to only those associated with a particular item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:86
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item ID: a search field where you can input the ID of the item "
+"you want to use. You can find an item's ID in the url of it's edit page; "
+"if you are editing the item and the url is `admin/item/11547/edit` then "
+"the item's ID is 11547."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:88
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:90
+msgid ""
+"Item resources also have an option for \"Quick add\". When this switch is"
+" flipped, all of the items in the drawer have a checkbox. You can use "
+"these checkboxes to add multiple items as a property at once. Note that "
+"you can only edit one property at a time, so all of the items must "
+"populate the same property (ex, Creator, Has Part)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:92
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:94
+msgid "URI"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:95
+msgid "URI fields link to an external website or online resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:100
+msgid "Advanced tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:101
+msgid ""
+"By default, Omeka S will use the media from the first item added to an "
+"item set to generate a thumbnail for the set. If you want to use a non-"
+"media image for the thumbnail for an item set you can set it here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:103
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:105
+msgid ""
+"The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the "
+"same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-"
+"options)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:107
+msgid ""
+"To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main"
+" work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:109
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:111
+msgid ""
+"The drawer offers two options: upload a file using your browser, or "
+"select from existing assets. To select an existing asset, simply click on"
+" it and it will automatically be assigned to the item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:113
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:115
+msgid ""
+"To remove an asset which you have assigned as a thumbnail, click the "
+"\"Clear\" button below the image of the asset. To replace it, click "
+"select and either choose or upload a new thumbnail asset."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:118
+msgid "Access Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:119
+msgid ""
+"Item sets have two settings which control their access. They can be "
+"*public* or *not public* and they can be *open* or *closed*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:121
+msgid ""
+"Use the *make public/private* button (eye icon) to make the item set "
+"visible to the public or only to all users of the Omeka S installation "
+"(not public)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:123
+msgid "*Open* sets can be edited and added to by any user on the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:125
+msgid ""
+"*Closed* sets are available and editable only by its creator, site "
+"admins, and global admins."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:127
+msgid ""
+" Open and Public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:129
+msgid ""
+" Closed and Private"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:131
+msgid ""
+"Note that the public/private and open/closed settings operate "
+"independently - you can have an open and private item set, for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:133
+msgid "Edit an item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:134
+msgid ""
+"Once you have created an item set, you can edit it at any time, either by"
+" clicking the edit icon (pencil button) or clicking on the item set's "
+"title and then clicking the Edit button in the upper right-hand corner of"
+" the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:136
+msgid "Options for editing an item set are the same as for creating an item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:138
+msgid ""
+"To cancel out of editing, click the Cancel button in the upper right "
+"corner, between the Delete and Save buttons."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:140
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:142
+msgid "Batch Editing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:144
+msgid ""
+"From the browse page of item sets (admin/item-set) you can batch edit "
+"item sets, using the dropdown menu on the upper right near the \"Add new "
+"item set\" button. You can select multiple item sets using the checkboxes"
+" on the left of each set's row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:146
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:148
+msgid "Batch actions are as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:150
+msgid "Edit selected: edit only the item sets that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:151
+msgid ""
+"Edit all: edit all the item sets returned by a search (default is all "
+"item sets)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:152
+msgid "Delete selected: delete only the item sets that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:153
+msgid ""
+"Delete all: delete all the item sets returned by a search (default is all"
+" item sets)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:155
+msgid "Choose one of these options and then click *Go*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:157
+msgid ""
+"**Batch editing** item sets takes you to a new page. The item sets being "
+"edited will display on the right side in a drawer, while the batch edit "
+"form gives you the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:159
+msgid "set visibility: a dropdown, select from public or not public."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:160
+msgid "set openness: a dropdown, select from open or not open."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:161
+msgid ""
+"set template: a dropdown, select from the installation's resource "
+"templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:162
+msgid "set class: a dropdown, select from classes of the installed vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:163
+msgid ""
+"clear property values: a dropdown menu with all the properties in all "
+"vocabularies, selecting from this will remove any values in that property"
+" in the affected item sets. Clear additional properties using the *Clear "
+"another property* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:165
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:167
+msgid ""
+"In addition, you can use the bottoms at the bottom of the batch edit "
+"form to add properties to every item set:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:169
+msgid "add text value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:170
+msgid "add resource value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:171
+msgid "add URI value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:173
+msgid ""
+"Selecting any of these will add a block to the form where you can select "
+"a property from the installed vocabularies and enter the value for that "
+"property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:175
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:177
+msgid ""
+"For the **delete actions**, a drawer will open on the right side of the "
+"screen telling you the number of item sets which will be deleted. Nothing"
+" will be deleted unless you click the red *Confirm Delete* button. This "
+"action cannot be undone. To opt out of deleting the item sets, click the "
+"X in the upper right corner of the deletion drawer. To confirm delete, "
+"check the \"Are you sure\" checkbox and then click *Confirm Delete*. Note"
+" that deleting the item set will not delete the items associated with "
+"that set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:179
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:181
+msgid "Delete Item Set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:182
+msgid ""
+"In addition to the batch delete function described above, you can also "
+"delete individual item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:184
+msgid ""
+"Note that deleting item sets does not delete any items associated with "
+"the item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:186
+msgid ""
+"From the Item Set browse view, you can delete an item set by clicking the"
+" trash can icon in the row for the item set you want to delete. This will"
+" open a drawer on the right with a message at the top asking you to "
+"confirm that you want to delete the item set, with the metadata for the "
+"item set below the confirm delete button. Click *Confirm delete* to "
+"delete the item set, or close the drawer to cancel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:188
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:190
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:193
+msgid ""
+"From the edit page for an Item Set, click the *Delete* button in the "
+"upper right-hand corner. This will open a drawer on the right side asking"
+" you to confirm that you want to delete the item set. Click *Confirm "
+"delete* to delete the item set, or close the drawer to cancel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/item-sets.md:195
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/items.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/items.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..118cf7cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/items.po
@@ -0,0 +1,940 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:1
+msgid "Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:3
+msgid "Items are the building blocks of the Omeka system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:5
+msgid ""
+"In Omeka S, items can be made available to you from the system "
+"administrator, and you may add items to your own site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Items are listed in the *Items* tab (one box icon), found on the left-"
+"hand navigation of the administrative dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:9
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:11
+msgid "Each item appears as a row, with columns for:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:13
+msgid "the *Title*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:14
+msgid ""
+"icons to *edit* (pencil), *delete* (trash can), or *view details* "
+"(ellipses)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:15
+msgid "the *Class*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:16
+msgid "the item’s *Owner*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:17
+msgid "and the date the item was *Created*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Options for navigating and creating items display above the table of "
+"items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:21
+msgid "On the right top of the Items window is the *Add new item* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:23
+msgid ""
+"On the left side is a display for the number of pages of items, with "
+"forward and back arrows. The current page number is an editable field — "
+"enter any valid page number and hit return/enter on your keyboard to go "
+"to that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:25
+msgid "In the center top is a button for [Advanced Search](../search.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Just above the table on the right are options for sorting the table of "
+"items, with two dropdown menus. The first lets you select between "
+"*Title*, *Identifier*, *Class*, *Owner,* and *(Date) Created*; the second"
+" allows you to sort ascending or descending. To apply, click the *sort* "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:29
+msgid ""
+"Between these and the table, on the left, is a dropdown for batch "
+"actions, including edit selected, edit all, delete selected, and delete "
+"all."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:31
+msgid "View"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:32
+msgid ""
+"To quickly view the basic information about an item, click the *view "
+"details* (ellipses) button in the row for the item, located next to the "
+"edit and delete buttons. This will open a drawer to the right of the list"
+" which displays the item’s title, description, visibility, any sites it "
+"is used in, and its associated media.."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:34
+msgid ""
+"For a more detailed look at an individual item, click on its title in the"
+" items browse table or when viewing its details."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:36
+msgid ""
+" "
+"The blue squares indicate where to click to open the full item view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:38
+msgid ""
+"When you view an individual item , there are tabs for the item’s "
+"*Metadata* and its *Linked Resources*. The right side of the page "
+"displays the item’s media, any *item sets* to which it belongs, its "
+"creation date, owner, and visibility."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:40
+msgid ""
+"An item’s *linked resources* (shown below) are resources, which are "
+"linked to this item through properties. Note that this section only shows"
+" resources which have been linked *to* this item (which have it for a "
+"property); resources which are linked *from* this item will display in "
+"the property which they fill."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:42
+msgid ""
+"Linked items are grouped by the property for which they use the current "
+"item. In the example below, the item William Shakespeare is used for the "
+"properties \"Creator,\" \"References,\" and \"list of authors\" for the "
+"linked resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:44
+msgid ""
+"You can filter linked resources to only display those referencing a "
+"specific property using the dropdown \"Filter by property.\" It will only"
+" display properties actively in use."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:46
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:48
+msgid "Adding an Item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:50
+msgid "To add a new item, begin by selecting the the *Add new item* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:52
+msgid ""
+"Before creating items, supervisors may want to create [Resource Templates"
+"](resource-template.md), which will load specific fields for various item"
+" types."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:54
+msgid "Values"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:55
+msgid ""
+"The Values tab is where you enter metadata, such as title, description, "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:57
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:59
+msgid ""
+"You can select a resource template from the drop-down menu. Resource "
+"templates are defined by the supervisors and editors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:61
+msgid "If using a resource template, the class should automatically load."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:62
+msgid ""
+"If not using a resource template, you may select a class from the "
+"dropdown menu (these are populated from the "
+"[Vocabularies](vocabularies.md) in your installation)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:64
+msgid ""
+"Add information to the properties which load. If you do not select a "
+"resource template or class, the Dublin Core properties Title and "
+"Description will load automatically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:66
+msgid ""
+"You may add text, a resource from the installation, or an external link "
+"in each field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:68
+msgid ""
+"Whether or not you use a resource template, you can add more properties "
+"to the item using the drawer on the right side of the screen. You can "
+"simply click open one of the vocabularies and click on the property you "
+"want to add, or you can use the “Filter properties” box to search for a "
+"specific property (this is helpful when you have multiple large "
+"vocabularies)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:70
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:72
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the property label in the drawer will automatically add it to"
+" the Item. If you add a property by accident, leave it blank and it will "
+"be removed from the item when you save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:74
+msgid ""
+"You can set individual properties as Private or Publicly visible using "
+"the eye icon for each property. Note that properties set to private are "
+"still visible to Global Admins, Supervisors, and Editors will be able to "
+"see properties even when set to private. Authors will be able to see all "
+"properties on items they own, but will not see private properties created"
+" by other users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:76
+msgid ""
+"In the image below, the first property (Title) is public as indicated by "
+"the open eye icon. The second property (Description) is private as "
+"indicated by the slashed-through eye icon. Clicking or hitting enter on "
+"the eye icon toggles between public and private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:78
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:80
+msgid "Text"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:81
+msgid "Text fields allow for unformatted text entry."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:83
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:85
+msgid ""
+"You can indicate the language for the content of an input using the globe"
+" symbol above the input (see the red arrow in the image below). Click on "
+"the globe to activate a text field, then enter the [IETF Language "
+"tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) code for the "
+"language in which the text is written."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:87 ../../docs/content/items.md:124
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:89
+msgid "Omeka Resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:90
+msgid ""
+"Omeka Resource fields create an internal link between the resource you "
+"are creating and the resource which fills that field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:92
+msgid ""
+"When creating an item, you have the option to use either another item or "
+"an item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:94
+msgid ""
+"Choosing a resource type will open a side drawer where you can browse all"
+" of those resources in the installation. You can use the search function "
+"at the top of the drawer to narrow down the list or to quickly find a "
+"specific item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:96
+msgid ""
+"Once you select an item or item set, detailed information will load, and "
+"you must click *select resource* to finish linking the resources. You can"
+" also click the *X* button in the upper right-hand corner to go back to "
+"the list of items or item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:98
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:100
+msgid ""
+"If you are using an Item resource for the property, you will have "
+"additional options for finding the item you want in the drawer. Open "
+"these options by clicking the triangle button next to the phrase \"Filter"
+" search\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:102
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:104
+msgid ""
+"This will open a menu below the button with the following options to "
+"filter the items in the drawer:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:106
+msgid ""
+"Filter by class: a dropdown where you can select any class provided by "
+"the vocabularies on the installation;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:107
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item set: a dropdown where you can limit the items displayed in"
+" the drawer to only those associated with a particular item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:108
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item ID: a search field where you can input the ID of the item "
+"you want to use. You can find an item's ID in the url of it's edit page; "
+"if you are editing the item and the url is `admin/item/11547/edit` then "
+"the item's ID is 11547."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:110
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:112
+msgid ""
+"Item resources also have an option for \"Quick add\". When this switch is"
+" flipped, all of the items in the drawer have a checkbox. You can use "
+"these checkboxes to add multiple items as a property at once. Note that "
+"you can only edit one property at a time, so all of the items must "
+"populate the same property (ex, Creator, Has Part)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:114
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:116
+msgid "URI"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:117
+msgid "URI fields link to an external website or online resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:119
+msgid ""
+"You may add other fields by selecting a property from the list on the "
+"right. Browse fields by vocabulary (Dublin Core, Bibliographic Ontology, "
+"etc), or search in the *filter properties* bar above the list of "
+"properties and vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:121
+msgid "Language"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:122
+msgid ""
+"You can indicate the language for the content of an input using the globe"
+" symbol above the input (see the red arrow in the image below). Click on "
+"the globe to activate a text field, then enter the [IETF Language "
+"tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in"
+" which the text is written."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:126
+msgid "Value order"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:127
+msgid ""
+"If you have multiple values for a property, you can reorder them by "
+"dragging and dropping. Click on the bar on the left of the value to grab "
+"that value, and drag it into the order that you want it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:129
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:132
+msgid "Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:133
+msgid ""
+"Use the *Media* tab to add images, video, or other files. Using the "
+"buttons on the *Add New Media* menu on the right side of the screen, "
+"select a media type (Upload, URL, oEmbed, YouTube, or HTML)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:136
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:138
+msgid "*Upload*: select a file to upload from your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:139
+msgid "*URL*: import media via a uri."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:140
+msgid "*HTML*: add html content as a media resource for your item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:141
+msgid "*IIIF*: Add an IIIF image via url."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:142
+msgid ""
+"*oEmbed*: insert an embedded representation of an external URL. Note that"
+" this will only work with content from [existing oEmbed "
+"implementations](http://oembed.com/#section7) - use the url in your "
+"browser’s location bar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:143
+msgid ""
+"*YouTube*: add a link to embed a YouTube video. Use the url from your "
+"browser’s location bar (with `/watch/` in it) rather than the `youtu.be` "
+"link."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:145
+msgid ""
+"You can edit media later by going by editing an item, navigating to the "
+"*media* tab, and clicking the edit button (pencil) for a media when "
+"editing the item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:147
+msgid ""
+"You can delete any media instance from the item's edit page using the "
+"delete button (trashcan) on the upper right corner of the media block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:149
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:151
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one media instance for an item, you can reorder "
+"them by dragging and drop each media instance block, using the icon of "
+"three lines in the upper left corner of the block as the anchor when "
+"dragging."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:153
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S uses the topmost media for an item to create thumbnail images for"
+" that item on browse and show pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:155
+msgid "Item Sets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:156
+msgid "You can only add items to existing item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:158
+msgid ""
+"From the right-hand menu, click on the owner of an item set, then click "
+"the name of the item set to add the item to that set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:160
+msgid ""
+"You can also filter item sets using the text entry bar above the list of "
+"users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:162
+msgid ""
+"To remove a connection between an item and item set, click the delete "
+"(trash can) button to the right of the item set title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:164
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:166
+msgid "Sites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:167
+msgid "Select sites to which to add your items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:169
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:171
+msgid ""
+"To add an item to a site, select a site from the menu in the right-hand "
+"drawer. You can filter sites by searching in the field at the top of the "
+"drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:173
+msgid ""
+"If there are sites which have \"auto-assign new items\" turned on in "
+"their settings, you can use this tab to remove this item from those "
+"sites. Click the trash can icon on the right side of the site's row to "
+"remove it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:175
+msgid "Advanced"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:176
+msgid ""
+"The advanced tab has two options. One lets you set a custom thumbnail for"
+" the item. The other allows you to change which user has ownership of the"
+" item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:178
+msgid "**Thumbnail**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:180
+msgid ""
+"By default, Omeka S will use the topmost media to generate a thumbnail "
+"for the item. If you want to use a non-media image for the thumbnail for "
+"an item you can set it here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:182
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:184
+msgid ""
+"When you use an asset thumbnail instead of uploading media, the asset "
+"thumbnail does not display on the item's public show page. This makes "
+"such thumbnails useful for items which have no media but which would "
+"benefit from a thumbnail for the browse view, or for items whose media "
+"does not render an elegant thumbnail, such as audio or visual files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:186
+msgid ""
+"The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the "
+"same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-"
+"options)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:188
+msgid ""
+"To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main"
+" work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:190
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:192
+msgid ""
+"The drawer offers two options: upload a file using your browser, or "
+"select from existing assets. To select an existing asset, simply click on"
+" it and it will automatically be assigned to the item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:194
+msgid ""
+"To remove an asset which you have assigned as a thumbnail, click the "
+"\"Clear\" button below the image of the asset. To replace it, click "
+"select and either choose or upload a new thumbnail asset."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:196
+msgid "**Owner**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:198
+msgid ""
+"The ownership of an item is usually assigned to the user account which "
+"creates the item. You can use this dropdown to reassign ownership. The "
+"dropdown will load the user names (not email addresses) of users in the "
+"installation. Select a new user and save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:200
+msgid "Visibility"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:201
+msgid ""
+"Use the *make public/private* button (eye icon) to set whether the item "
+"is visible to the public or only to users of the Omeka S system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:203
+msgid ""
+" "
+"Public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:205
+msgid ""
+" Private"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:207
+msgid ""
+"Note that if an item is private, all the media attached is private, but "
+"an item which is public can have attached media which are set to be "
+"either public or private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:209
+msgid "Edit an item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:210
+msgid ""
+"Once you have created an item, you can edit it at any time, either by "
+"clicking the edit icon (pencil button) or clicking on the item's title "
+"and then clicking the Edit button in the upper right-hand corner of the "
+"screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:212
+msgid ""
+"To cancel out of editing, click the Cancel button in the upper right "
+"corner, between the Delete and Save buttons."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:214
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:216
+msgid ""
+"Editing options are the same as when creating a new item, with the "
+"addition of the ability to add any media which has been saved to an item "
+"as a property:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:218
+msgid "Media as property"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:219
+msgid ""
+"Once you have created an item and added media to it, you will also have "
+"the option to use media *attached to that item* for a property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:221
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:223
+msgid ""
+"To use a media resource for a property, select the media option for the "
+"element (1). The drawer which opens will display all media attached to "
+"the item. Select the media which you want to use(2); this will switch the"
+" drawer to just that media (second image). Click the *Select Resource* "
+"button at the bottom of the drawer to complete the process (3)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:225
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:227
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:230
+msgid "Batch actions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:232
+msgid ""
+"From the browse page of items (admin/item) you can batch edit items, "
+"using the dropdown menu on the left near the pagination buttons. You can "
+"select multiple items using the checkboxes on the left of each item's "
+"row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:234
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:236
+msgid "Batch actions are as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:238
+msgid "Edit selected: edit only the items that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:239
+msgid "Edit all: edit all the items returned by a search (default is all items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:240
+msgid "Delete selected: delete only the items that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:241
+msgid ""
+"Delete all: delete all the items returned by a search (default is all "
+"items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:243
+msgid "Choose one of these options and then click *Go*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:245
+msgid ""
+"**Batch editing** items takes you to a new page. The items being edited "
+"will display on the right side in a drawer, while the batch edit form "
+"gives you the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:247
+msgid "set visibility: a dropdown, select from public or not public."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:248
+msgid ""
+"set template: a dropdown, select from the installation's resource "
+"templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:249
+msgid "set class: a dropdown, select from classes of the installed vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:250
+msgid ""
+"add to item set: a dropdown, select from item sets on the installation. "
+"Add to an additional item set using the *add another item set* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:251
+msgid ""
+"remove from item set: a dropdown, select from item sets on the "
+"installation. Remove from an additional item set using the *remove "
+"another item set* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:252
+msgid ""
+"clear property values: a dropdown menu with all the properties in all "
+"vocabularies, selecting from this will remove any values in that property"
+" in the affected items. Clear additional properties using the *Clear "
+"another property* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:253
+msgid ""
+"Set value visibility: set the visibility of a specific property to either"
+" public or not public. Unlike the radio buttons at the top of the form, "
+"this will only affect a single property instead of the entire item. "
+"Select a property from the text field (type to begin searching), and the "
+"choose either the *public* or *not public* radio button for this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:255
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:257
+msgid ""
+"In addition, you can use the buttons at the bottom of the batch edit "
+"form to add properties to every item:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:259
+msgid "add text value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:260
+msgid "add resource value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:261
+msgid "add URI value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:263
+msgid ""
+"Selecting any of these will add a block to the form where you can select "
+"a property from the installed vocabularies and enter the value for that "
+"property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:265
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:267
+msgid ""
+"For the **delete actions**, a drawer will open on the right side of the "
+"screen telling you the number of items which will be deleted. Nothing "
+"will be deleted unless you click the red *Confirm Delete* button. This "
+"action cannot be undone. To opt out of deleting the items, click the X in"
+" the upper right corner of the deletion drawer. To confirm delete, check "
+"the \"Are you sure\" checkbox and then click *Confirm Delete*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/items.md:269
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/media.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/media.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f5649b89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/media.po
@@ -0,0 +1,609 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:1
+msgid "Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Media are only created by adding them to an Item. Media cannot exist "
+"independently."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To view the media associated with an item, click on the media’s name in "
+"the right-hand sidebar on the item view page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:7
+msgid ""
+"To view all media in the installation, navigate to the Items browse "
+"first. The media browse will appear below Items in the left-hand "
+"navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:9
+msgid "Add Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:11
+msgid ""
+"Adding media includes uploading a file, or directly attaching content "
+"with oEmbed, YouTube URLs, IIIF URLs, or writing HTML."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:13
+msgid "Media can only be added via an [item](../content/items.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:15
+msgid "Browse media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:16
+msgid ""
+"To browse media, first go to the admin item browse. In the left hand "
+"navigation, an option for Media browse will appear under the Item browse "
+"(you may have to click on the triangle to expand the menu below Items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:18
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:20
+msgid "Media are displayed in a table. Each media is a row, with columns for:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:22
+msgid "Select media (a checkbox)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:23
+msgid "Media *title*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:24
+msgid ""
+"icons to *edit* (pencil), *delete* (trash can), or *view details* "
+"(ellipses)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:25
+msgid "the media's *Class*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:26
+msgid "the media's *Owner*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:27
+msgid "and the date the media was *Created*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:29
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:31
+msgid ""
+"Options for navigating and creating items display above the table of "
+"items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:33
+msgid ""
+"On the left side is a display for the number of pages of media, with "
+"forward and back arrows. The current page number is an editable field - "
+"enter any valid page number and hit return/enter on your keyboard to go "
+"to that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:35
+msgid ""
+"In the center top is a button for [Advanced Search](../search.md#media-"
+"advanced-search)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:37
+msgid ""
+"Just above the table on the right are options for sorting media, with two"
+" dropdown menus. The first lets you select between *Title*, *Class*, "
+"*Owner,* and *(date)Created*; the second allows you to sort ascending or "
+"descending. To apply, click the *sort* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:39
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the title of any media will take you to its metadata page. "
+"This page displays any metadata in the main work area, with a sidebar on "
+"the right listing the visibility, associated item (an active link), date "
+"created, MIME type, Size, Ingester, Source, and links to the file "
+"derivatives."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:41
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:44
+msgid "Edit Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:45
+msgid "To edit existing media, you can:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:47
+msgid "Go to the Browse page and click the pencil/edit icon for the media's row"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:48
+msgid ""
+"Go to the Media browse page, click on the title to view the media's "
+"metadata and then click the \"*Edit media* button in the upper right hand"
+" corner"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:49
+msgid ""
+"Click on the media's name in the right-hand sidebar of an item's page to "
+"go to the media's metadata, and then click on *Edit media* from there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:51
+msgid ""
+"Editing media is very similar to editing [items](../content/items) or "
+"[item sets](../content/item-sets)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:53
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:55
+msgid "Values"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:57
+msgid ""
+"If desired, you can select a resource template from the drop-down menu. "
+"Resource templates are defined by site administrators and editors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:59
+msgid "If using a resource template, the class should automatically load."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:60
+msgid ""
+"If not using a resource template, you may select a class from the "
+"dropdown menu (these are populated from the "
+"[Vocabularies](vocabularies.md) in your installation)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:62
+msgid ""
+"Add information to the properties which load. If you do not select a "
+"resource template or class, the Dublin Core properties Title and "
+"Description will load automatically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:64
+msgid ""
+"You may add text, a resource from the installation, or an external link "
+"in each field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:66
+msgid ""
+"Note that if you add the property `dcterms:title`, its contents will "
+"replace the autogenerated title of the media. This is useful if dealing "
+"with url or media uploads with auto-generated names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:68
+msgid "**Text** fields allow for unformatted text entry."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:70
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:72
+msgid ""
+"You can indicate the language for the content of an input using the globe"
+" symbol above the input (see the red arrow in the image below). Click on "
+"the globe to activate a text field, then enter the [ISO "
+"639-1](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes) code for "
+"the language in which the text is written."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:74 ../../docs/content/media.md:104
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:76
+msgid ""
+"**Omeka Resource** fields create an internal link between the resource "
+"you are creating and the resource which fills that field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:78
+msgid ""
+"You have the option to use either an item, another media, or an item set."
+" Once you select an item or item set, detailed information will load, and"
+" you must click *select resource* to finish linking the resources. You "
+"can also click the *X* button in the upper right-hand corner to go back "
+"to the list of items or item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:80
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:82
+msgid ""
+"If you are using an Item resource for the property, you will have "
+"additional options for finding the item you want in the drawer. Open "
+"these options by clicking the triangle button next to the phrase \"Filter"
+" search\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:84
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:86
+msgid ""
+"This will open a menu below the button with the following options to "
+"filter the items in the drawer:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:88
+msgid ""
+"Filter by class: a dropdown where you can select any class provided by "
+"the vocabularies on the installation;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:89
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item set: a dropdown where you can limit the items displayed in"
+" the drawer to only those associated with a particular item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:90
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item ID: a search field where you can input the ID of the item "
+"you want to use. You can find an item's ID in the url of it's edit page; "
+"if you are editing the item and the url is `admin/item/11547/edit` then "
+"the item's ID is 11547."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:92
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:94
+msgid ""
+"Item resources also have an option for \"Quick add\". When this switch is"
+" flipped, all of the items in the drawer have a checkbox. You can use "
+"these checkboxes to add multiple items as a property at once. Note that "
+"you can only edit one property at a time, so all of the items must "
+"populate the same property (ex, Creator, Has Part)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:96
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:98
+msgid "**URI** fields link to an external website or online resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:100
+msgid ""
+"You may add other fields by selecting a property from the list on the "
+"right. Browse fields by vocabulary (Dublin Core, Bibliographic Ontology, "
+"etc), or search in the *filter properties* bar above the list of "
+"properties and vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:102
+msgid ""
+"**Language** You can indicate the language for the content of an input "
+"using the globe symbol above the input (see the red arrow in the image "
+"below). Click on the globe to activate a text field, then enter the [ISO "
+"639-1](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes) code for "
+"the language in which the text is written."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:106
+msgid ""
+"You can add properties by selecting from the list on the right side of "
+"the screen. You can either browse fields by vocabulary (Dublin Core, "
+"Bibliographic Ontology, etc), or search in the *filter properties* bar "
+"above the list of properties and vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:108
+msgid ""
+"Automatically generated metadata, such as source, visibility, and part of"
+" item, cannot be edited."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:110
+msgid ""
+"Use the *make public/private* button (eye icon) to set whether the media "
+"is visible to the public or only to users of the OmekaS install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:112
+msgid ""
+" Public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:114
+msgid ""
+" Private"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:116
+msgid ""
+"Note that if an item is private, all the media attached is private, but "
+"an item which is public can have attached media which are set to be "
+"either public or private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:118
+msgid ""
+"You can set individual properties as Private or Publicly visible using "
+"the eye icon for each property. Note that properties set to private are "
+"still visible to Global Admins, Site Admins, and Editors will be able to "
+"see properties even when set to private. Authors will be able to see all "
+"properties on items they own, but will not see private properties created"
+" by other users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:120
+msgid ""
+"In the image below, the first property (Title) is public as indicated by "
+"the open eye icon. The second property (Description) is private as "
+"indicated by the slashed-through eye icon. Clicking or hitting enter on "
+"the eye icon toggles between public and private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:122
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:124
+msgid "Thumbnail"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:125
+msgid ""
+"Not all media generate an elegant thumbnail, for example pdf or text file"
+" documents or some video files. You can use this tab to set a "
+"representative thumbnail for the media which will be used on browse pages"
+" but not on the page for the item or its media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:127
+msgid ""
+"The assets you select from and upload as thumbnails in this tab are the "
+"same as those created for [site logos](../sites/site_theme.md#settings-"
+"options)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:129
+msgid ""
+"To assign an asset as a thumbnail, click on the Select button in the main"
+" work area of the tab. This will open a drawer on the right side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:131
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:133
+msgid ""
+"The drawer offers two options: upload a file using your browser, or "
+"select from existing assets. To select an existing asset, simply click on"
+" it and it will automatically be assigned to the media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:135
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:137
+msgid ""
+"To remove an asset which you have assigned as a thumbnail, click the "
+"\"Clear\" button below the image of the asset. To replace it, click "
+"select and either choose or upload a new thumbnail asset."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:139
+msgid "Batch editing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:141
+msgid ""
+"From the media browse page, you can batch edit media, using the dropdown "
+"menu on left just above the table of media. You can select multiple items"
+" using the checkboxes on the left of each item's row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:143
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:145
+msgid "Batch actions are as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:147
+msgid "Edit selected: edit only the items that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:148
+msgid "Edit all: edit all the items returned by a search (default is all items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:149
+msgid "Delete selected: delete only the items that are selected on the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:150
+msgid ""
+"Delete all: delete all the items returned by a search (default is all "
+"items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:152
+msgid "Choose one of these options and then click *Go*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:154
+msgid ""
+"**Batch editing** media takes you to a new page. The media being edited "
+"will display on the right side in a drawer, while the batch edit form "
+"gives you the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:156
+msgid ""
+"set visibility: radio buttons, select from Public, Not public, or No "
+"change"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:157
+msgid ""
+"set template: a dropdown, select from the installation's resource "
+"templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:158
+msgid "set class: a dropdown, select from classes of the installed vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:159
+msgid "Clear language: a checkbox"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:160
+msgid "Set language: a text entry box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:161
+msgid ""
+"Clear property values: a dropdown menu with all the properties in all "
+"vocabularies, selecting from this will remove any values in that property"
+" in the affected items. Clear additional properties using the *Clear "
+"another property* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:163
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:165
+msgid ""
+"In addition, you can use the bottoms at the bottom of the batch edit form"
+" to add properties to every media:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:167
+msgid "add text value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:168
+msgid "add resource value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:169
+msgid "add URI value"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:171
+msgid ""
+"Selecting any of these will add a block to the form where you can select "
+"a property from the installed vocabularies and enter the value for that "
+"property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:173
+msgid ""
+"For the **delete actions**, a drawer will open on the right side of the "
+"screen telling you the number of media which will be deleted. Nothing "
+"will be deleted unless you click the red *Confirm Delete* button. This "
+"action cannot be undone. To opt out of deleting the media, click the X in"
+" the upper right corner of the deletion drawer. To confirm delete, check "
+"the \"Are you sure\" checkbox and then click *Confirm Delete*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/media.md:175
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/resource-template.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/resource-template.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..62e0dce1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/resource-template.po
@@ -0,0 +1,492 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:1
+msgid "Resource Templates"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:3
+msgid ""
+"A *Resource Template* is a set of pre-defined Properties, optionally with"
+" a Class, to guide Item creation and the interpretation of Properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Resource templates are managed from the Admin Dashboard, accessed through"
+" the left-hand navigation under the tab labeled *Resource Templates*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:7
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:9
+msgid ""
+"On the left side above the table is a display for the number of pages of "
+"items, with forward and back arrows. The current page number is an "
+"editable field - enter any valid page number and hit return/enter on your"
+" keyboard to go to that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:11
+msgid ""
+"On the right side above the table are two drop-down menus which let you "
+"sort resource templates. You can sort by: *label*, *class*, *owner*, or "
+"number of *items* assigned to a template, and have these display in "
+"either ascending or descending order."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:13
+msgid ""
+"You can use the icons in each template’s row to: *edit* (pencil), "
+"*delete* (trash can), or *view details* (ellipses). If you click on the "
+"number of items listed for a template, it will take you to a list of all "
+"those items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:15
+msgid ""
+"[This screencast](https://vimeo.com/290924872) gives an overview of using"
+" and creating Resource Templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:17
+msgid ""
+"[This screencast](https://vimeo.com/290924872) gives an overview of "
+"creating and applying resource templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:19
+msgid "Base Resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:20
+msgid ""
+"All Omeka S installations include a Base Resource template which maps to "
+"the metadata fields required by the Digital Public Library of America "
+"(DPLA). It will display in the table of resource templates as \"Base "
+"Resource\" with no owner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:22
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:24
+msgid ""
+"The Base Resource template contains the following Dublin Core fields: "
+"Title; Rights; Type; Creator; Date; Description; Format; Language; "
+"Spatial Coverage (Place); Publisher; Alternative Title: Contributor; "
+"Extent; Identifier; Relation; Is Replaced By; Replaces; RightsHolder; "
+"Subject; Temporal Coverage."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:26
+msgid "Create a resource template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:27
+msgid ""
+"From the Resource Templates tab in the Admin Dashboard, click the *Add "
+"new resource template* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:29
+msgid ""
+"The New resource template page will load with options for Label, "
+"suggested class, and the properties *Title* (dcterms:title) and "
+"*Description* (dcterms:description)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:31
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:33
+msgid ""
+"In the Label property, type the label for your new template. This will be"
+" the text displayed in the dropdown for Resource Templates when creating "
+"an item, so be sure that the label is clear."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:34
+msgid "If desired, select a class to associate with the template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:35
+msgid ""
+"Add properties from the list of vocabularies in the menu on the right "
+"side of the screen. You can filter properties in the text box or select "
+"from a specific vocabulary using the arrows to the right of the "
+"vocabulary names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:36
+msgid "If desired, modify the property (see Property options, below)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:38
+msgid "Be sure to Save your resource template before leaving this page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:40
+msgid "Property options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:41
+msgid ""
+"You can modify the display label, comment on the label, set a property as"
+" required, and set the default data type for each property in your "
+"template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:43
+msgid ""
+"To do this, click the edit (pencil) icon in the row for the property you "
+"wish to modify. This will open a drawer on the right side of the screen "
+"with the ability to edit the properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:45
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:47
+msgid ""
+"**Label** Change the displayed label of the property that appears when "
+"the template is applied to an item by entering the text you want to "
+"appear in the *Alternate Label* field for each property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:50
+msgid ""
+"**Comment** Add alternate comments for the property in the field "
+"*Alternate* in this section. This will change the text under the property"
+" name when users are creating items using your Resource Template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:53
+msgid ""
+"**Other options** In this section are a series of additional options for"
+" modifying the property when it is used with this template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:56
+msgid ""
+"The *Use for resource title* checkbox allows you to select a property to "
+"serve as the title for the resource, instead of the default "
+"(`dcterms:title`). This property will display in the \"title\" field on "
+"browse pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:58
+msgid ""
+"The *Use for resource description* checkbox allows you to select a "
+"property to serve as the description for the resource on browse pages, "
+"instead of the default (`dcterms:description`)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:60
+msgid ""
+"The *Required* checkbox sets whether a property is required when the "
+"template is in use. If checked, users will not be able to save an item or"
+" item set using this template without adding data for this property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:62
+msgid ""
+"The *Private* checkbox sets the visibility of the data for this property."
+" If checked, any data added by a user for this property will only be "
+"visible to the owner of the item or item set, global administrators, site"
+" administrators, and editors. It will not be visible to the public. "
+"*Note:* users working with the template will be able to toggle the "
+"visibility of this property on a case-by-case basis."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:64
+msgid ""
+"Using the *Data type* dropdown, you can designate the data types for the "
+"property. Whichever you choose will be automatically loaded once someone "
+"selects that Resource Type and they will only be able to use these data "
+"type for the element when using this Resource Template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:66
+msgid "Literal: text and/or html input"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:67
+msgid "URI: a link with label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:68
+msgid "Resource: either an existing Item or Item Set in the Omeka S install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:69
+msgid ""
+"Additional options may be added by modules, such as [Numeric Data "
+"Types](../modules/numericdatatypes) and [Value "
+"Suggest](../modules/valuesuggest)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:71
+msgid ""
+"You can select multiple data types, for example giving users the option "
+"of Literal or Resource for input, but not URI. All choices will appear in"
+" the data types field with an X to the right of their label - click the X"
+" to remove that data type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:73
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:75
+msgid ""
+"Note: you must click the *Set Changes* at the bottom of the drawer for "
+"each property that you edit before exiting the drawer or moving on to "
+"another property! If you do not click *Set Changes*, your edits will not "
+"be saved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:77
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:79
+msgid ""
+"Users who select this resource template when creating an item will still "
+"be able to add other properties to the item, and that they will only be "
+"required to fill out those which you check as required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:81
+msgid "Edit a resource template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:82
+msgid ""
+"Once you have created a resource template, you can edit it at any time by"
+" clicking the edit icon in the table of resource templates, or by "
+"clicking Edit in the upper right hand corner when viewing a resource "
+"template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:84
+msgid ""
+"If you decide you do not want to edit the template or do not wish to save"
+" your changes, simply click the Cancel button located between the Delete "
+"and Save buttons in the upper right hand corner of the window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:86
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:88
+msgid "Reviewing resource templates"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:89
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the title of a resource template takes you to a table view of"
+" all the properties and property options for that template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:91
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:93
+msgid "Each property displays as a row in the table, with columns for:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:95
+msgid ""
+"Original label, with an ellipses button to see which the property's "
+"vocabulary, term, and original comment;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:96
+msgid "Data type;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:97
+msgid "Alternate label;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:98
+msgid "Alternate comment;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:99
+msgid "Whether the property is required;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:100
+msgid "Whether the property's data is set to private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:102
+msgid ""
+"Click the ellipses next to the original label to open a draw displaying "
+"the property's vocabulary, term, and original comment."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:104
+msgid ""
+"Use the buttons in the upper right of this page to export or edit the "
+"template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:106
+msgid "Sharing Resource Template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:107
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to share a resource template between Omeka S installations"
+" by exporting and importing them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:109
+msgid "Export Resource Template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:110
+msgid "To export a resource template from your Omeka S installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:112
+msgid "Go to the Resource Templates menu on the main navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:113
+msgid "Click the Label of the template you want to export."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:114
+msgid ""
+"On the resource template view page, click the Export button in the upper "
+"right corner of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:116
+msgid ""
+"[^]"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:118
+msgid ""
+"Exporting a Resource Template will download it to your computer's default"
+" download location as a json file with the same name as the Resource "
+"Template's Label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:120
+msgid "Import Resource Template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:121
+msgid ""
+"To import a resource template (exported from a different S installation) "
+"into your Omeka S installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:123
+msgid "Go to the Resource Templates menu on the main navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:124
+msgid "Click the Import button in the upper right corner of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:126
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:128
+msgid "On the Resource Template: Import page, click the *Choose File* button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:129
+msgid ""
+"This will open your browsers file selection window. Choose the json file "
+"for the resource template you want to import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:130
+msgid "Click the Review import button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:131
+msgid ""
+"On the Review page, you will be able to check that properties and "
+"property options are correct"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:132
+msgid ""
+"Imported templates which used Value Suggest or Custom Vocab will indicate"
+" in the Data Type column what the original source was, and a dropdown to "
+"allow you to select a new Data Type (if you do not have the necessary "
+"modules, the dropdown will only show the default options)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:134
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/resource-template.md:136
+msgid ""
+"NB: If you want to import a Resource Template using a Custom Vocab, you "
+"will need to manually reproduce the Custom Vocab on the second Omeka S "
+"installation *before* importing the resource template."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/vocabularies.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/vocabularies.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ae645e46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/content/vocabularies.po
@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:1
+msgid "Vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Vocabularies are a collection of published RDF metadata Classes and "
+"Properties for describing a Resource. These exist and are created "
+"externally to Omeka, and can be imported (with some limitations) into "
+"Omeka S for use throughout the Installation. The most-used Vocabulary is "
+"Dublin Core Terms (dcterms:)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Global and Site Administrators can manage their installation’s "
+"vocabularies from the *Vocabularies* tab on the left hand navigation of "
+"the Admin Dashboard. OmekaS comes pre-loaded with the following "
+"vocabularies: [Dublin Core](http://purl.org/dc/terms/); [Dublin Core "
+"Type](http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/); [Bibliographic "
+"Ontology](http://purl.org/ontology/bibo/); and [Friend of a "
+"Friend](http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:7
+msgid ""
+"This [screencast](https://vimeo.com/449764902) walks through managing and"
+" adding vocabularies. [ ![First frame of a Vimeo video showing the "
+"vocabularies interface](contentfiles/VocabsVideo-"
+"still.png)(https://vimeo.com/449764902)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:10
+msgid "Managing vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:11
+msgid ""
+"The main view of the *Vocabularies* tab in the Admin Dashboard displays "
+"the existing vocabularies for the Omeka S install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:13
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:15
+msgid ""
+"Vocabularies are displayed in a table with headings for *Label* (name of "
+"vocabulary), *Prefix* (used by the database), *Classes* (number of "
+"classes in the vocabulary), and *Properties* (number of properties in the"
+" vocabulary). You can sort vocabularies by these columns using the up and"
+" down arrows at the right end of each column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:17
+msgid ""
+"You can use the icons at the right of the Label field to manage "
+"individual vocabularies. The edit icon (pencil) takes you to the edit "
+"page for that vocabulary, the delete icon (trash can) opens a sidebar to "
+"delete the vocabulary, and the details icon (ellipses) opens a sidebar "
+"with information about the vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:19
+msgid ""
+"When editing a vocabulary, you can make changes to the *label* and add "
+"*comments*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:21
+msgid "Adding a vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:22
+msgid ""
+"New vocabularies must be imported from an existing metadata standard "
+"source. In order to import a new vocabulary, you must have a vocabulary "
+"file or a stable link to a vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:24
+msgid ""
+"The New vocabulary page has three sections: Basic Info, File, and "
+"Advanced."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:26
+msgid ""
+"Note that you may have to research in order to find the prefix, namespace"
+" uri, and label for the vocabulary, as these are not standardized. In "
+"addition to the vocabulary's website, you might consult "
+"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:28
+msgid ""
+"After you have imported a vocabulary, you can use the Edit function to "
+"modify the vocabulary's Label and Comment, and to upload an updated "
+"vocabulary RDF file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:30
+msgid "Basic info"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:31
+msgid "This section contains the basic information for the vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Label (required): the display name for the vocabulary in lists (ex "
+"\"Dublin Core,\" \"Friend of a Friend\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:34
+msgid "Comment: any comments you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:35
+msgid "Namespace uri (required): this should be provided by the vocabulary;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Namespace prefix (required): This will display before the property, "
+"indicating which vocabulary (for example, the prefix for Dublin Core is "
+"dcterms)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:38
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:40
+msgid "File"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:41
+msgid "This section deals with the file for the vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:43
+msgid "Upload the file using your browser's file manager **or**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:44
+msgid ""
+"Vocabulary URL: if not uploading a vocabulary file, enter the "
+"vocabulary's url here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:45
+msgid "File format: a dropdown, select from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:46
+msgid "Autodetect"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:47
+msgid "JSON-LD (.jsonld)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:48
+msgid "N-Triples (.nt)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:49
+msgid "Notation3 (.n3)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:50
+msgid "RDF/XML (.rdf)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:51
+msgid "Turtle (.ttl)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:54
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:56
+msgid "Advanced"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:57
+msgid "This section has advanced vocabulary settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:59
+msgid ""
+"Language: Enter the preferred language of the labels and comments using "
+"an IETF language tag."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:60
+msgid ""
+"Label property: if this vocabulary uses an unconventional property for "
+"labels, enter the full property URI in angle brackets (`<`, `>`)in this "
+"field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:61
+msgid ""
+"Comment property: if you are using the above label property, enter the "
+"corresponding property URI in angle brackets (`<`, `>`) in this field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:63
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:65
+msgid "Editing a vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:66
+msgid ""
+"You can edit existing vocabularies by clicking the edit button (pencil "
+"icon) on the table of vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:68
+msgid ""
+"You can also update the vocabulary by either uploading a new vocabulary "
+"file or entering the vocabulary url and saving changes. You will be able "
+"to review any changes when updating a vocabulary. If you decide you do "
+"not wish to save your changes, or click on the edit button by mistake, "
+"you can click the Cancel button next to the Save button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:71
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:73
+msgid "Vocabulary Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:74
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S will import properly formatted vocabularies/ontologies. "
+"rdfs:Class and rdfs:Property data will be available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:76
+msgid ""
+"For Web Ontology Language (OWL) data, Omeka S will store only the RDF/S "
+"super-Properties and -Classes. Omeka S does not enforce any declaration "
+"or inferencing rules from OWL. Thus, for example, an owl:Class is treated"
+" in Omeka S like an rdfs:Class."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:78
+msgid ""
+"Similarly, the following are all treated only as rdfs:Property. OWL "
+"domains and ranges are also not enforced or stored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:80 ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:85
+#:
+msgid "owl:ObjectProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:81 ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:86
+#:
+msgid "owl:DatatypeProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:82 ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:87
+#:
+msgid "owl:SymmetricProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:83 ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:88
+#:
+msgid "owl:TransitiveProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:84 ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:89
+#:
+msgid "owl:FunctionalProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:90
+msgid "owl:InverseFunctionalProperty"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:92
+msgid ""
+"For example, an imported ontology with an owl:ObjectProperty is not "
+"restricted to having objects that are URI’s: Omeka S will accept a "
+"Literal value without complaint."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:94
+msgid ""
+"It is up to the person entering metadata to adhere to the standards as "
+"best they can."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:96
+msgid "Deleting a vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:97
+msgid ""
+"With the exception of Dublin Core and Dublin Core Type, you can delete "
+"any vocabulary from your Omeka S installation, either from the Vocabulary"
+" browse or the Vocabulary edit page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:99
+msgid ""
+"From the Vocabulary browse page, click the trash can/delete icon in the "
+"row for the vocabulary you want to delete (1). A drawer will open on the "
+"right side of the browser asking you to confirm that you want to delete "
+"the vocabulary (2). To delete, click the *Confirm delete* button, and to "
+"cancel, simply close the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:101
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:103
+msgid ""
+"From the edit vocabulary page, you can click the large red *Delete* "
+"button in the upper right-hand corner of the page. This will open a "
+"drawer which will ask you to confirm the deletion. To delete, click the "
+"*Confirm delete* button, and to cancel, simply close the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/content/vocabularies.md:105
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/errorLogging.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/errorLogging.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cfc6380d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/errorLogging.po
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:1
+msgid "Retrieving Error Messages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:3
+msgid ""
+"If you are experiencing problems with your Omeka S installation, or you "
+"want to turn on development-style error tracking, you can do so in two "
+"different ways. You will need to edit the `.htaccess` and/or "
+"`local.config.php` files, depending on which way you choose. You must use"
+" a ftp or terminal client to do so; if you're not sure how to do this, "
+"please contact your system administrator or hosting provider."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:5
+msgid "Display Error Details"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:7
+msgid ""
+"One option is to enable on-page display of error details. This will cause"
+" \"Omeka S has encountered an error\" pages to show the error message and"
+" details instead of a generic message, and also will display PHP-level "
+"errors and warnings on pages if they occur."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:9
+msgid "To enable this display, edit your `.htaccess` file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:11
+msgid ""
+"The `.htaccess` file is located in the main folder of your Omeka S "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:12
+msgid ""
+"Change line 1 of that file from `SetEnv APPLICATION_ENV \"production\"` "
+"to `SetEnv APPLICATION_ENV \"development\"`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:14
+msgid "Log Errors"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:16
+msgid ""
+"Another option for retrieving error detail information is enabling "
+"logging in Omeka S. With logging enabled, Omeka S will write out the "
+"details of all errors to a file. Any \"Omeka S has encountered an error\""
+" page will have its details logged, and additional debugging/warning "
+"information may also be logged. You may want to choose this option if you"
+" want to get detailed error information but do not want to expose error "
+"messages to visitors or other users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:18
+msgid "To enable error logging, edit your `local.config.php` file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:20
+msgid "The `local.config.php` file is located in the `config` folder."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:21
+msgid "Change line 4 from `'log' => false,` to `'log' => true,`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/errorLogging.md:22
+msgid ""
+"Errors will be logged to the file `log/application.log`. Make sure this "
+"file is writable by your web server."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/frontpage.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/frontpage.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c6f65b81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/frontpage.po
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:1
+msgid "Front Page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S allows users to build multiple sites per installation which are "
+"not necessarily connected. However, each installation has, by default, a "
+"front page which lists the sites in the installation. This page is "
+"accessed by going to the main url of your Omeka S installation; if your "
+"[admin dashboard](admin-dashboard.md) was at "
+"`yourdomain.net/omekas/admin`, then you would find this page a "
+"`yourdomain.net/omekas/`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:5
+msgid ""
+"The page displays all sites which a user has permission to see, along "
+"with the site's summary if one exists. If someone is not logged in, they "
+"will only see public sites. A logged in Global Admin, by contrast, would "
+"see all existing sites on the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:7
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:9
+msgid ""
+"If you want this site to be hidden from site visitors, you can use the "
+"[setting Default Site](admin/settings.md#global-settings) to select a "
+"public site on your installation to which visitors will be redirected "
+"when they navigate to your base url (`yourdomain.net/omekas/`)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/frontpage.md:11
+msgid ""
+"You can use the Default Site option in conjunction with the [site page "
+"block](sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks) \"List of sites\" to create a "
+"branded site index and to add an about page for the overall installation."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/glossary.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/glossary.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a02c33e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/glossary.po
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:1
+msgid "Glossary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The following glossary should help to clarify some of the less-familiar "
+"terms in Omeka S. Where appropriate, we have provided a roughly analogous"
+" term from Omeka Classic, although some analogies are stronger than "
+"others."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:6
+msgid ""
+"**Class**: A kind of Resource, as defined by a Vocabulary. Often, "
+"Vocabularies expect particular Properties to be used with particular "
+"Classes. For example, a `foaf:Person` would not have a "
+"`dcterms:publisher` Property, but could be expected to have a "
+"`foaf:familyName` Property. *Omeka Classic analogy*: Item Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:9
+msgid ""
+"**File**: Data uploaded to an Omeka S installation and associated "
+"directly with an Item (see also: Media). *Omeka Classic analogy*: "
+"File (but the analogy is weak)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:12
+msgid ""
+"**Global Admin**: An administrator who controls everything, and is "
+"typically the person who created the Installation. *Omeka Classic "
+"analogy*: Superuser"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:15
+msgid ""
+"**Installation**: An instance of Omeka S. Typically, a central IT "
+"department of an institution does the process of installing, and probably"
+" also creates sites for others."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:17
+msgid ""
+"**Item**: The records used to build an Omeka S Site. Items are shared and"
+" available to any Site in an Installation, unless explicitly excluded "
+"from sharing. *Omeka Classic analogy*: Item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:20
+msgid ""
+"**Item Set**: An aggregation of Items. Items can belong to any number of "
+"Item Sets. *Omeka Classic analogy*: Collection, Items with the same tag"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:23
+msgid ""
+"**Media**: Additional representations or descriptions of an Item, beyond "
+"metadata from vocabularies. Typically, this refers to a File (of any "
+"type, including, e.g., text or HTML snippets), but could also refer to "
+"external data sources such as a YouTube video, Slideshare deck, Dspace "
+"bitstream, etc. - *Omeka Classic analogy*: File (but the analogy "
+"the weak)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:26
+msgid ""
+"**Property**: A defined — to one degree or another — kind of metadata "
+"used to describe a Resource. The most common is dcterms:title, for the "
+"written, human-readable title of an Item. The Values for Properties can "
+"be written language intended for humans or other sentient beings to read "
+"(‘Literals’), Resources (understood here as internal to an Omeka S "
+"Installation), or External URIs (e.g., a URI to a DBpedia resource page)."
+" *Omeka Classic analogy*: Element"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:29
+msgid ""
+"**Resource Template**: A set of pre-defined Properties, and optionally a "
+"Class, to use to guide Item creation and interpretation of Properties. "
+"Typical usage is to create a template for, e.g., a `foaf:Person` that "
+"makes Items using that template show the inputs for the expected or "
+"desired `foaf: properties`, and sets the Class of the Item to "
+"`foaf:Person`. *Omeka Classic analogy*: Item Type (but the analogy is "
+"weak) cf. Class"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:32
+msgid ""
+"**Site Admin**: An administrator of a single Site within an Omeka S "
+"Installation. *Omeka Classic analogy*: Superuser role"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:35
+msgid ""
+"**Value**: The actual data that fills out the Resource-Property-Value "
+"triple. If the property is 'dcterms:title', a reasonable Value might be "
+"“Heart of Darkness”. Literal Values might also have information about the"
+" language in which that Value is expressed attached. Values can also be "
+"Resources or URIs to external data (preferably URIs that return RDF data,"
+" but I don’t think we’re going to enforce that). *Omeka Classic "
+"analogy*: Element Text"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/glossary.md:38
+msgid ""
+"**Vocabulary**: A collection of published RDF metadata Classes and "
+"Properties for describing a Resource. These exist and are created "
+"externally to Omeka, and can be imported (with some limitations) into "
+"Omeka S for use throughout the Installation. The most-used Vocabulary is "
+"Dublin Core Terms (dcterms:). *Omeka Classic analogy*: Element Set"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/index.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/index.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..424efd13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/index.po
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:1
+msgid "Omeka S User Manual"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S is a web publication system for universities, galleries, "
+"libraries, archives, and museums. It creates a local network of "
+"independently curated exhibits sharing a collaboratively built pool of "
+"items and their metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:5
+msgid ""
+"The sections of this manual correspond to the navigation sections on the "
+"left-hand side of the [administrative dashboard](admin-dashboard.md) of "
+"an Omeka S Installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:7
+msgid ""
+"**Sites** Creating, editing, and managing sites, the public-facing "
+"parts of an Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:10
+msgid ""
+"**Resources** Creating, editing, and managing the content of an "
+"installation: items, item sets, media, vocabularies, and resource "
+"templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:13
+msgid ""
+"**Admin** Access to functionality in the admin section varies by user "
+"role, but can include: users, jobs, and settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:16
+msgid ""
+"**Modules** This section opens with basic information on managing the "
+"modules which extend the functionality of your Omeka S installation and "
+"sites. It then offers specific documentaiton for Omeka S modules created "
+"by RRCHNM, listed in alphabetial order."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:19
+msgid ""
+"This manual also includes a [glossary](glossary.md), instructions on "
+"conducting [searches](search.md), and how to turn on [error "
+"logging](errorLogging.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:21
+msgid ""
+"Screencasts to supplement the documentation are linked from relevant "
+"pages, and can be browsed in the [Omeka S collection on "
+"Vimeo](https://vimeo.com/showcase/4215056)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/index.md:23
+msgid "This documentation is CC-BY-NC"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/install.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/install.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b5820a32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/install.po
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:1
+msgid "Installing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Basic instructions for installing and updating from GitHub can be found "
+"in the [ReadMe](https://github.com/omeka/omeka-s/blob/develop/README.md) "
+"of the Omeka S github repository."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:5
+msgid "System Requirements"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:6
+msgid "In order to install Omeka S, you will need a server running the following:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:8
+msgid "Linux"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Apache (with "
+"[AllowOverride](https://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/mod/core.html#allowoverride)"
+" set to \"All\" and [mod_rewrite "
+"](http://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/mod/mod_rewrite.html) enabled)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:10
+msgid "MySQL, minimum version 5.6.4 (or MariaDB, minimum version 10.0.5)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:11
+msgid ""
+"PHP, minumum version 7.1, with "
+"[PDO](http://php.net/manual/en/intro.pdo.php), "
+"[pdo_mysql](http://php.net/manual/en/ref.pdo-mysql.php), and "
+"[xml](http://php.net/manual/en/intro.xml.php) extensions installed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:12
+msgid ""
+"Optional, to create thumbnails: ImageMagick version 6.7.5 or greater, the"
+" PHP `imagick` extension, or the PHP `gd` extension"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:14
+msgid "Installing from released zip file"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:15
+msgid ""
+"NB: Before you install Omeka S, you need to create a MySQL database and "
+"user. Omeka S must have a dedicated database (you cannot use a prefix for"
+" a database used by another system or Omeka S or Classic installation). "
+"For more information on creating a database and user, please see your "
+"hosting's support documentation or talk to your system administratory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:17 ../../docs/install.md:50
+#:
+msgid "Download the latest release from the release page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:18
+msgid ""
+"Open config/database.ini and add your MySQL username, password, database "
+"name, and host name. The user and database must be created before this "
+"step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:19
+msgid "Make sure the files/ directory is writable by Apache."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:20
+msgid ""
+"In your web browser, navigate to the admin page for your Omeka S "
+"installation (yoururl/admin), where you can complete installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:22
+msgid "Initial setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:23
+msgid ""
+"Once you have successfully installed and configured the database.ini "
+"file, you can navigate to the admin location of your Omeka S "
+"installation. If your installation is `/myomekas/` then your admin "
+"dashboard would be located at `/myomekas/admin`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:25
+msgid ""
+"The first time you to the install site, you will need to enter "
+"information for the first user, along with basic information for your "
+"install. There are two sections on this page: *Create the first user* and"
+" *Settings*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:27
+msgid "In the First User section, enter:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:29
+msgid "an *email* address, and type again to confirm."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:30
+msgid "confirm the *password* and type again in the next input to confirm."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:31
+msgid "a *display name* for the user"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Note that you can change all of these later in the [User](admin/users.md)"
+" management section of your install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:35
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:37
+msgid "In the Settings section, enter:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:39
+msgid "An *installation title* which will display on the admin site,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:40
+msgid "The installation's *time zone* (select from dropdown), and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:41
+msgid "select a *locale* for the language of the admin side of the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:43
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:45
+msgid ""
+"You can changes these at any time in the in the "
+"[Settings](admin/settings.md) section of your [Admin Dashboard](admin-"
+"dashboard.md)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:47
+msgid ""
+"See [Configuration Options](configuration.md) for information on settings"
+" for thumbnail generation, php path, and more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:49
+msgid "Updating"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:51
+msgid ""
+"Make a copy of your `/config` directory. You will need to restore your "
+"`local.config.php` and `database.ini` files from that copy."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:52
+msgid "Make a copy of your `/modules` and `/themes` directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:53
+msgid "Make a copy of your `/files` directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:54
+msgid ""
+"Remove all Omeka S files, and replace them with the files from the "
+"updated zip file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:55
+msgid ""
+"Replace your original `/config/local.config.php` and "
+"`/config/database.ini` file, and the `/modules`, `/themes`, and `/files` "
+"directories that you copied."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:56
+msgid ""
+"In your web browser, go to your site's admin page (yoururl/admin) and run"
+" any migrations that are needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:58
+msgid "Install on Windows or Mac OS (basic development purpose only)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:59
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S does not support proprietary or closed source operating systems. "
+"However, for **basic development purposes** or for quick training, Omeka "
+"can run with [WAMP](http://www.wampserver.com), "
+"[MAMP](https://www.mamp.info) or similar tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:61
+msgid ""
+"Follow the standard installation instructions. You will need to make the "
+"following [configuration](configuration.md) changes to the file "
+"`config/local.config.php` to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:63
+msgid ""
+"First, the php path may need to be set if php. Edit the config file and "
+"fill the `phpcli_path` at line 12 with the appropriate path for your "
+"operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:65
+msgid ""
+"Second, you need to configure Omeka S to use the thumbnailer which is "
+"available in your server. Edit the `local.config.php` file with the "
+"following, based on what is available for your system:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:67
+msgid ""
+"replace the default thumbnailer `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\ImageMagick` "
+"by `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\Gd`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:68
+msgid ""
+"replace the default thumbnailer `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\ImageMagick` "
+"by `Omeka\\File\\Thumbnailer\\Imagick`, and enable Imagick in the file "
+"`php.ini` of your server via the server admin interface or directly in "
+"the file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:69
+msgid ""
+"keep the default thumbnailer, but install the command line tool "
+"`imagemagick` and set its directory as value of `imagemagick_dir`. To "
+"install imagemagick, see the documentation of your server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/install.md:71
+msgid ""
+"[GD](https://secure.php.net/manual/en/intro.image.php) is a basic graphic"
+" library installed by default with PHP. It can create thumbnails for "
+"common image formats only (jpeg, gif, png). [Imagick and "
+"ImageMagick](https://www.imagemagick.org) are the same library and can "
+"create thumbnails for more than 200 formats. The difference is that the "
+"first is integrated in php and generally older than the command-line "
+"version."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/collecting.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/collecting.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2adf106e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/collecting.po
@@ -0,0 +1,528 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:1
+msgid "Collecting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Collecting module allows you to gather public contributions through "
+"your sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Once activated on the [modules](index.md) tab of the admin dashboard, "
+"Collecting is configured on a site-by-site basis."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:7
+msgid "Site settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Collecting adds a section to your [site "
+"settings](../sites/site_settings.md) where you can manage terms of "
+"service and email for the collecting forms for this site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:11
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:13
+msgid "In this section are two fields:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:15
+msgid ""
+"**Terms of service** is a multi-line field where you can enter terms of "
+"services for material collected through this site. This text is linked "
+"from the form just above the submit button:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:17
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the phrase \"Terms of Service\" will open a new window so "
+"that people filling out the form do not lose the information they have "
+"entered."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:21
+msgid ""
+"**Email address** allows you to set a custom address from which "
+"submission emails will be sent. If left blank, these emails will be sent "
+"from the administrator email address in the [Global "
+"Settings](../admin/settings.md) for the Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:23
+msgid "Managing Collecting Forms"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:25
+msgid ""
+"If Collecting is active, then a tab for Collecting will appear in the "
+"context menu for every site. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:28
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on this will take you to a list of your collecting forms for "
+"that site. If you have just installed the module, the Collecting Forms "
+"page will display the message \"This site has no collecting forms.\" To "
+"add a new form, click the *Add new form* in the upper right hand corner "
+"of the window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:30
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:32
+msgid "Add New Form"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:33
+msgid ""
+"The Add Collecting Form page has two sections: the first has a set of "
+"fields and options for you to complete; the second is where you add and "
+"edit the prompts which will make up the form that site visitors see and "
+"fill out."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:35
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:37
+msgid "Fields and Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:38
+msgid ""
+"*Label:* name the collecting form. The label will appear as a header "
+"above the form on the public side, so the label should be descriptive and"
+" helpful to both you and site visitors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:39
+msgid "*Item Set:* select the item set to which you want to add collected items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:40
+msgid "*Anonymity Type:* a dropdown with three options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:41
+msgid ""
+"\"User sets own anonymity\": users can decide whether they contribute "
+"anonymously and whether their items can be published)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:42
+msgid ""
+"\"User Public and User Name inputs are publicly visible\": both the "
+"user's name and their items will be made public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:43
+msgid ""
+"\"User Public and User Name inputs are private\": both inputs remain "
+"public."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:44
+msgid ""
+"*Success Text*: the message that displays on a new page if the item is "
+"successfully collected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:45
+msgid ""
+"*Email text*: the message in the email that will be sent to site visitors"
+" who submit an item, if you collect an email address from them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:47
+msgid "Prompts"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:48
+msgid ""
+"Prompts are listed in a table which gives their *Type* and the display "
+"*Text* on the public form. These prompts make up the form which site "
+"visitors will see (in addition to the label, discussed above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:50
+msgid ""
+"To add a new prompt, click the *Add prompt* button just below the Prompts"
+" header. This will open a side drawer with a dropdown to select Prompt "
+"type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:52
+msgid ""
+"On selection, the options for that type will load in the sidebar for you "
+"to edit, with a Save Changes button at the bottom of the options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:54
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:56
+msgid "The Collecting module has Prompt Types with options as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:58
+msgid ""
+"**Item Property**: select a property from the installation's vocabularies"
+" for the visitor to use to describe the item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:60
+msgid "Property: select a property from the vocabularies (example: Description)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:61 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:86
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:91 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:101
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:106 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:111
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:121
+msgid ""
+"Prompt Text: If you want the prompt to be something other than the "
+"property label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:62 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:92
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:112 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:122
+msgid "Input type: length and kind of input box. Choose from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:63 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:93
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:113 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:123
+msgid "Text box (one line)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:64 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:94
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:114 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:124
+msgid "Text box (multiple line)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:65 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:95
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:115 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:125
+msgid "Select menu (dropdown)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:66 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:96
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:116 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:126
+msgid ""
+"If you choose \"Select menu,\" you will need to enter the options for the"
+" menu in the *Select Menu Options* field that will appear, with one "
+"option per line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:67
+msgid "Item resource (will appear as dropdown)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:68
+msgid ""
+"This will offer the user the choice of existing items to add as a "
+"property value. You can paste anything after the `admin/` in the url of "
+"an advanced search to load specific items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:69
+msgid ""
+"[Custom Vocab](../modules/customvocab/) (requires that plugin to be "
+"installed). If selected, an additional dropdown will load. Use this to "
+"select from your existing Custom Vocabs. This will load as a dropdown for"
+" the users on the public side of the form."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:70
+msgid ""
+"If you have [Numeric data types](../modules/numericdatatypes/) installed,"
+" you will also have the options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:71
+msgid "Numeric timestamp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:72
+msgid "Numeric interval"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:73
+msgid "Numeric duration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:74
+msgid "Numeric integer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:75 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:87
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:97 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:102
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:107 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:117
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:127
+msgid "Check the Required? box if the prompt is required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:77
+msgid "**Item Media** allows visitors to add media to their item. Media Type:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:80
+msgid "A dropdown for Media type, with the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:81
+msgid "Upload one, which allows users to upload one file;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:82
+msgid ""
+"Upload multiple, which allows users to upload multiple files at once "
+"using the browser's native file picker (with shift or control keys);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:83
+msgid "Map (requires Mapping module);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:84
+msgid "URL;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:85
+msgid "HTML."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:89
+msgid ""
+"**Item Supplementary** additional information for the item, not linked to"
+" any particularly vocabulary or property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:99
+msgid ""
+"**User Name** which will be used to assign the item owner. If the person "
+"using the form is a logged-in user of the Omeka S installation, this will"
+" autopopulate."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:104
+msgid ""
+"**User Email** where the person adding the item can give their email. If "
+"this is left blank, they will not receive an email with the text in the "
+"*Email Text* field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:109
+msgid ""
+"**User Private** collect additional information from the user which will "
+"be kept private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:119
+msgid ""
+"**User Public** collect additional information from the user which can be"
+" made public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:129
+msgid ""
+"**HTML** insert a block of HTML text into the form, for additional "
+"guidance, information, etc. The Prompt Text field for this prompt has "
+"WYSIWG formatting options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:131
+msgid ""
+"You can rearrange the order of prompts by dragging and dropping them "
+"using the three-line icon on the far left of the Prompt Type label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:133 ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:154
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:135
+msgid "Manage an existing form"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:136
+msgid ""
+"Once you have at least one Collecting form, they will appear on the "
+"Collecting Forms page. Click the edit button (pencil) to edit the form. "
+"Click on the form label to see more information about the form and view "
+"collected items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:138
+msgid "The form page has two tabs: Form Information and Collected Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:140
+msgid ""
+"Form tabs show you the existing data for label, anonymity type, and item "
+"set, along with a table of all of the prompts, in order, with their type,"
+" text, and whether they prompt is required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:142
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:144
+msgid ""
+"To edit the form, click the *Edit form* button in the upper right hand "
+"corner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:146
+msgid "The options are in the edit form page are the same as when adding a form."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:148
+msgid ""
+"To edit a prompt, click the edit button (pencil) for the prompt. This "
+"will open the sidebar drawer for that prompt."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:150
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:152
+msgid ""
+"Rearrange the order of prompts by dragging and dropping them using the "
+"three-line icon on the far left of the Prompt Type label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:157
+msgid "Add a Collecting Form to Site Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:159
+msgid "To add a collecting form to a page:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:161
+msgid ""
+"Go to the page on which you want the form to appear (or add a new page "
+"for the form)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:162
+msgid "From the *Add New Block* sidebar select the *Collecting* block"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:163
+msgid ""
+"On the Collecting block, click the box for the form you want to include. "
+"You can add more than one form to the page by checking more than one box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:165
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:167
+msgid "Managing Collected Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:169
+msgid ""
+"Items added via a collecting form will appear in the Items section of the"
+" Admin Dashboard, but you will likely find it easier to manage them "
+"through the Collecting tab of the site to which through which they were "
+"collected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:171
+msgid ""
+"To see the items collected with a specific form, go to the Collecting tab"
+" in the context menu for the site and click on the form label. Then click"
+" the *Collected Items* tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:173
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:175
+msgid ""
+"This tab has a table of collected items with their: Title, the Date "
+"Submitted, Reviewed By, Status, and ellipses (three dots)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:177
+msgid ""
+"To see the collected information, including user name, email, etc, for "
+"any item, click on the more info ellipses. Clicking on an item title will"
+" take you to the item's edit page (under Items not the site's context "
+"menu)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:179
+msgid ""
+"A collected item can have one of three status messages: Needs Review, "
+"Public, and Private. To change the status of an item, select the desired "
+"status from the dropdown and then click the *Update statuses* button in "
+"the upper right corner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/collecting.md:181
+msgid ""
+"When you update the status of an item from \"Needs Review\" to either "
+"\"Public\" or \"Private\", your name will appear in the row for that item"
+" as the user the item has been *Reviewed by*. If you have multiple people"
+" working on a site, this can help you keep track of who has approved the "
+"collected items."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csseditor.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csseditor.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84ae971b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csseditor.po
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:1
+msgid "CSS Editor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The CSS Editor module allows you to write CSS from the Omeka S admin "
+"interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Once activated on the [modules](https://omeka.org/s/docs/user-"
+"manual/modules/) tab of the admin dashboard, CSS Editor is used on a "
+"site-by-site basis."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:7
+msgid "Managing Custom CSS"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:9
+msgid ""
+"If CSSEditor is active, then a tab for CSSEditor will appear in the "
+"context menu for every site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:11
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:13
+msgid "Using the CSSEditor interface"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:15
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:17
+msgid ""
+"The first large text area is where you write your individual styles. Use "
+"that text area as you would a stylesheet file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:19
+msgid ""
+"If you are new to working with CSS, we recommend the following free "
+"resources for getting started:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:21
+msgid ""
+"[Mozilla's \"Intro to CSS\"](https://learning.mozilla.org/en-"
+"US/activities/intermediate-web-lit/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:22
+msgid ""
+"[Codecademy's \"Learn CSS\" course](https://www.codecademy.com/learn"
+"/learn-css)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:23
+msgid "[Marksheet's \"CSS Basics\"](https://marksheet.io/css-basics.html)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:25
+msgid ""
+"Next, CSS Editor also allows you to include external stylesheets by "
+"entering their URLs. There is no limit to the number of external "
+"stylesheet URLs you can enter. Each text input can take a single URL, and"
+" additional inputs can be created by clicking the button that reads \"Add"
+" another stylesheet\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:27
+msgid ""
+"To remove external stylesheets, either clear the text inputs, or click on"
+" the trash can icon if there are multiple stylesheet fields."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:29
+msgid ""
+"
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:31
+msgid "Tutorial: Using a Google Webfont"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:33
+msgid ""
+"You can make your Omeka S site more distinct by using a custom font. "
+"[Google provides a free library of webfonts](https://fonts.google.com/), "
+"and this tutorial will demonstrate how to apply a webfont to an Omeka S "
+"site using the \"Default\" theme through the CSS Editor interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:35
+msgid ""
+"For reference, the \"Default\" theme begins looking like this, using the "
+"\"Open Sans\" font."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:37
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:39
+msgid "This tutorial will override \"Open Sans\" with the \"Lato\" font family."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Navigate to [Google Fonts](https://fonts.google.com/). Find the \"Lato\" "
+"font family and click on the orange \"+\" button to select it.
"
+"
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:43
+msgid ""
+"A bar labeled \"1 Family Selected\" will appear in the lower right "
+"corner. Click on this bar.
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:45
+msgid ""
+"The bar will open a panel with the information you'll need to use Lato in"
+" your site. The first section, \"Embed this font\", has the external "
+"stylesheet URL you need. Select the URL in the `href` attribute, as "
+"pictured.
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:47
+msgid ""
+"Copy this URL into one of the \"External stylesheets\" inputs in CSS "
+"Editor.
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:49
+msgid ""
+"Back in the Google Fonts panel, there is the second section titled "
+"\"Specify in CSS\". Copy the `font-family` rule.  "
+"
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:51
+msgid ""
+"For this tutorial, you are setting Lato as the site's default font. To do"
+" this, in the large \"CSS\" text area in CSS Editor, set the `body` "
+"element's font family using the rule you just copied. 
"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:53
+msgid "Click the \"Save\" button in the top right corner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:55
+msgid "Now the \"Default\" theme should look like this."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csseditor.md:57
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csvimport.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csvimport.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..752ebc17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/csvimport.po
@@ -0,0 +1,1570 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:1
+msgid "CSV Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The CSV Import module allows you to import items or users into your Omeka"
+" S install from a csv (comma separated values), tsv (tab-separated "
+"values) or odf (open document format) file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:5
+msgid "Please note that an import must have a specific import type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:7
+msgid "Preparing your CSV file"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Most spreadsheet editors (including Microsoft Excel, Google Sheets, and "
+"Apple Numbers) can export to csv format."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:11
+msgid ""
+"CSV files for import must be encoded in UTF-8, so when exporting or "
+"saving a new document, be sure to check that the encoding is UTF-8."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:13
+msgid ""
+"If the spreadsheet is already created, take a moment to think about which"
+" columns you want to match to which vocabulary properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:15
+msgid ""
+"*Note* Your csv file *must have a header row* in order for the module to "
+"process it correctly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:17
+msgid ""
+"If you have multiple inputs for a single property, you can separate them "
+"with a secondary *multivalue separator*. For example, a work with "
+"multiple authors (E.B. White and William Strunk Jr.) with the column for "
+"Creator containing \"E.B. White; William Strunk Jr\" has a semicolon (;) "
+"as the multivalue separator. When imported into Omeka S, each of these "
+"would appear as a separate entry in the property (Creator: E.B. White and"
+" Creator: William Strunk Jr.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:19
+msgid "Automapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:20
+msgid ""
+"The module will automatically automap column headers if they conform to "
+"the property terms of your installation's "
+"[vocabularies](../content/vocabularies.md). For example, a CSV file with "
+"a column header \"dcterms:title\" would automap to the Dublin Core Title "
+"property when the CSV is loaded for mapping."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:22
+msgid ""
+"To find the terms you should use for your column headers, go to the "
+"Vocabularies tab from the admin dashboard. Click on the number of "
+"properties for the vocabulary you want to use (Dublin Core in the image "
+"below)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:24
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:26
+msgid ""
+"In the table of vocabulary properties, there is a column for *Term*. Use "
+"the Term for the property you want to automap in the CSV Import. For "
+"example, \"dcterms:abstract\" would automap to the Dublin Core property "
+"\"Absract\" and \"foaf:firstName\" would automap to the Friend of a "
+"Friend property \"firstName\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:28
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:30
+msgid ""
+"In addition, there is a setting in the inital import settings to automap "
+"with simple labels - this will work with columns whose names match a "
+"vocabulary label, for example \"Title\" or \"date\". Note that this "
+"option defaults to Dublin Core before proceeding through other installed "
+"vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:32
+msgid "Initial Import Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Start an import by clicking on the CSV Importer tab on the left-hand "
+"navigation. This will open the initial Import Settings page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:36
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:38
+msgid ""
+"For the Spreadsheet option, use the *Choose File* button to select the "
+"file from your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:39
+msgid ""
+"From the *CSV Column delimiter* dropdown, choose from the following "
+"options (this should match the formatting of your file)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:40
+msgid "comma (default)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:41
+msgid "semi-colon"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:42
+msgid "colon"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:43
+msgid "tabulation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:44
+msgid "carriage return"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:45
+msgid "space"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:46
+msgid "pipe"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:48
+msgid ""
+"From the *CSV column enclosure* dropdown, choose the option which "
+"encloses long text in your file:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:49
+msgid "double quote (default)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:50
+msgid "quote"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:51
+msgid "hash"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:53
+msgid "From the *Import Type* dropdown, select what you are importing:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:54
+msgid "Item Sets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:55
+msgid "Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:56
+msgid "Media (must relate to already existing Items)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:57
+msgid "Mixed resources (spreadsheet can inlcude Item Sets, Items, and Media)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:58
+msgid "Users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:60
+msgid ""
+"Check the box to *Automap with simple labels.* This will automap not only"
+" specially formatted column headings but also column headings which match"
+" existing vocabulary property labels. Note that this option defaults to "
+"Dublin Core before proceeding through other installed vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:62
+msgid ""
+"Comments are useful as they appear on the \"Past Imports\" page; make a "
+"note about what is being imported and any settings you may have on this "
+"page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:64
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:66
+msgid "Click the *next* button to continue with the import process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:68
+msgid "Import Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:69
+msgid ""
+"To import items, select \"Items\" under the \"Import type\" on the first "
+"page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:71 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:209
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:338
+msgid "When you click next, the page will load with the following tabs:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:73 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:211
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:340 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:475
+msgid "Map to Omeka S data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:74 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:212
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:341
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays a table with the columns from your spreadsheet as rows."
+" Each row displays:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:76 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:214
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:343 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:478
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:625
+msgid "a Checkbox"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:77 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:215
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:344 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:479
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:626
+msgid "Column header from the spreadsheet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:78 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:216
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:345 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:480
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:627
+msgid "A plus symbol button for adding or modifying a mapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:79 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:217
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:346 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:481
+msgid "A wrench symbol button for spreadsheet column options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:80 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:218
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:347 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:482
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:628
+msgid "A trash can to delete mappings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:81 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:219
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:348 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:483
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:629
+msgid "A column to show options selected"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:83
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:85 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:223
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:352
+msgid "Mapping options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:87 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:225
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:354 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:491
+msgid ""
+"To map a column header to a vocabulary property, click on the plus symbol"
+" button to the left of the column header. This will open a drawer on the "
+"right-hand side of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:89 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:227
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:356 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:493
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:91 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:229
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:358 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:495
+msgid "The drawer has multiple options for mapping:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:93 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:231
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:360
+msgid ""
+"**Properties** select a property to map the column data to, from any of "
+"the installed vocabularies. Use the Filter field to search the available "
+"properties for a specific property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:95 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:233
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:362
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:97 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:500
+msgid ""
+"**Item-specific data** has a dropdown to set Item Set by selected "
+"property. If you have a column with data for an Item Set to which you "
+"want to add the item, you can set how it maps using this dropdown. You "
+"can either use the Item Set's internal ID, or any one of its properties "
+"(title, description)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:99 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:502
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:101 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:239
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:368
+msgid ""
+"**Generic data** also has a dropdown where you can set one of four "
+"options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:103
+msgid ""
+"*Resource template (by label):* set the template for an item by name. The"
+" name of the template as entered in the spreadsheet and the name of the "
+"template in Omeka S must match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:104
+msgid ""
+"*Resource class (by term):* set the resource class for an item. The term "
+"for the class in the spreadsheet and in the Omeka S installation must "
+"match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:105
+msgid ""
+"*Owner (by email address):* set an item's owner by email address. This "
+"must be the email address associated with the user's account in the Omeka"
+" S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:106
+msgid ""
+"*Visibility public/private:* set the visibility of the item. Use "
+"\"private\" or \"public\" in the spreadsheet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:108 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:246
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:375 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:519
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:110
+msgid ""
+"**Media source** If the column in your spreadsheet is a media source, "
+"select which kind from the dropdown:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:112 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:379
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:523
+msgid "HTML"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:113 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:380
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:524
+msgid "IIIF Image (link)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:114 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:381
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:525
+msgid "oEmbed (link)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:115 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:382
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:526
+msgid "URL"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:116 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:383
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:527
+msgid "YouTube (link)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:118 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:385
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:529
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:120 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:248
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:387 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:531
+msgid ""
+"Be sure to click the \"Apply Changes\" at the bottom of the drawer or "
+"nothing you set here will be kept."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:122 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:250
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:389 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:533
+msgid ""
+"To remove a mapping, click the trash can icon in the row for that data "
+"mapping. It will remove *only* the mapping, not the column data."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:124 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:252
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:391 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:535
+msgid ""
+"If you have data in a column in your CSV which you do not want to bring "
+"in to your Omeka S installation, simply do not map that column to a "
+"property or data type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:126 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:254
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:393 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:537
+msgid "Column options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:127 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:255
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:394 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:538
+msgid ""
+"To access options for data in a column of your csv (represented by a row "
+"in the import table), click the wrench icon for that column heading."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:129 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:257
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:396 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:540
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:131 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:259
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:398 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:542
+msgid ""
+"Column options are in addition to mappings. If you add options without "
+"also mapping column data to resource, media, or other data, nothing will "
+"be imported."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:133 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:261
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:400 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:544
+msgid ""
+"This will open a drawer on the right side of the browser window with the "
+"following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:135 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:263
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:402
+msgid ""
+"**Use multivalve separator:** check this box to use the multivalue "
+"separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator in "
+"the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic Settings tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:136 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:264
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:403 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:547
+msgid ""
+"**Language:** is a field where you can set the language for this column "
+"using the [IETF Language "
+"tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag) for the language in"
+" which the text is written. This will override what you have entered in "
+"basic settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:137 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:265
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:404 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:548
+msgid ""
+"**Data type:** is a dropdown with at least three options, which "
+"correspond to the [values](../content/items.md#values) one can use when "
+"adding properties to an item:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:138 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:266
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:405
+msgid "Import as text (default)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:139 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:267
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:406 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:550
+msgid ""
+"Import as URL reference. You can set the label for the URI by including "
+"the desired text after a space, for example: `http://example.com This Is"
+" The Label`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:140 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:268
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:407 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:551
+msgid ""
+"Import as Omeka S resource ID. Note that you must have the correct ID for"
+" the resource. A resources' ID is the number sequence at the end of the "
+"url when on the view or edit page, so for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is "
+"11576."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:141 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:269
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:408 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:552
+msgid ""
+"If you have certain modules installed, such as Numeric Data Types, there "
+"may be additional data type options supplied by those modules."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:142 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:270
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:409 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:553
+msgid ""
+"**Import values as private**: check this box to set all property values "
+"*in this column* private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:144
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:146 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:155
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:281 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:420
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:564
+msgid ""
+"Be sure to click the Apply Changes button at the bottom of the drawer in "
+"order to save your changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:148 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:274
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:413 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:557
+msgid ""
+"To remove a column option setting, click the wrench icon again and undo "
+"your changes manually."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:150 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:276
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:415 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:559
+msgid "Batch edit"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:151
+msgid ""
+"When you select one or more rows in the table (columns from your csv "
+"file), you can use the \"Batch edit options\" button to apply the column "
+"options described above - multivalue separator, language, data type, and "
+"property privacy - to multiple csv columns at once."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:153
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:157
+msgid "Item import Basic Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:158 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:284
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:423 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:567
+msgid ""
+"These settings apply to the entire csv which you are importing. Note that"
+" some of these settings can be overwritten by column options in the Map "
+"to Omeka S data tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:160
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:162
+msgid ""
+"**Resource Template:** select a resource template from the drop-down menu"
+" to apply to the imported items. You can use the search field at the top "
+"of the dropdown to narrow results or find a particular template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:163
+msgid ""
+"**Class:** select a class from the drop-down menu to apply to the "
+"imported items. You can use the search field at the top of the dropdown "
+"to narrow results or find a particular class."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:164
+msgid ""
+"**Owner:** set the owner for the Items by selecting a user from the drop-"
+"down menu. You can use the search field at the top of the dropdown to "
+"narrow results or find a particular user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:165
+msgid ""
+"**Visibility:** set the visibility of the imported items as public or "
+"private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:166 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:431
+msgid ""
+"**Item Sets:** add the imported items to a specific item set or sets "
+"using the dropdown menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:167 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:293
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:432 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:577
+msgid ""
+"**Multivalue Separator:** enter the multivalue separator character here, "
+"if you have used one. - The columns of data in your CSV should be "
+"separated by commas, however within those columns you can add a special "
+"character to create multiple inputs, for example a semicolon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:169 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:295
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:434 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:579
+msgid ""
+"**Language:** set the language of the values in the spreadsheet using the"
+" appropriate [IETF Language "
+"tag](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IETF_language_tag)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:171
+msgid "Item import Advanced Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:173 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:299
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:437 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:582
+msgid "There are two options on this tab which are only for advanced use."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:175
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:177 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:303
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:441 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:586
+msgid "Action"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:179 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:305
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:443 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:588
+msgid ""
+"This setting allows you to change the action of process from a straight "
+"import to one of the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:181 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:307
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:445 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:590
+msgid ""
+"**Create a new resource:** default option. Each row in the CSV will "
+"become a new resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:182 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:308
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:446 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:591
+msgid "**Append data to the resource:** add new data to the resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:183 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:309
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:447 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:592
+msgid ""
+"**Revise data of the resource:** replace existing data in the resource "
+"with data from the csv, except if empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:184 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:310
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:448 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:593
+msgid ""
+"**Update data of the resource:** replace existing data in the resource "
+"with data from the csv, even when the cell is empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:185 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:311
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:449 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:594
+msgid ""
+"**Replace all data of the resource:** remove all properties of the "
+"resource, and fill with new information from the sheet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:186 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:312
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:450 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:595
+msgid "**Delete the resource:** delete all matching resources"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:188 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:314
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:452 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:597
+msgid ""
+"If you select one of these options from the dropdown, three additional "
+"settings will appear on the tab. These settings help the process "
+"determine which resources to take action on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:190 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:318
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:456 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:601
+msgid ""
+"**Resource identifier column:** Select from a dropdown of the columns in "
+"your CSV. This is the data from your spreadsheet which maps to existing "
+"data in your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:191 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:319
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:457 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:602
+msgid ""
+"**Resource identifier property:** select from a dropdown of all "
+"properties in your Omeka S installation. This should be the property in "
+"which you already have data, that you used to create the column data "
+"above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:192 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:320
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:458 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:603
+msgid ""
+"Example: if the data in the Resource identifier column is \"Title\" with "
+"the first row of data having a title \"A Study in Scarlet,\" and you set "
+"Resource identifier property to \"Dublin Core: Title,\" then the actions "
+"will operate on a resource already in your Omeka S installation whose "
+"dc:title property is \"A Study in Scarlet\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:193 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:321
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:459 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:604
+msgid "This will only work with exact matches."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:194 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:322
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:460 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:605
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one resource with matching data, it will only take "
+"action on the oldest resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:195 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:323
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:461 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:606
+msgid ""
+"**Action on unidentified resources:** This option determines what to do "
+"when no matching resource exists in the Omeka S installation, but the "
+"selected action only applies to an existing resource (\"Append\", "
+"\"Revise\", \"Update\", or \"Replace\"). This option is not used when the"
+" main action is \"Create\" or \"Delete\" Your options are two radio "
+"buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:196 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:324
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:462 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:607
+msgid "Skip the row"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:197 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:325
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:463 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:608
+msgid "Create a new resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:199 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:327
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:465 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:610
+msgid "Other advanced settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:201 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:328
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:467 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:612
+msgid ""
+"In addition to the above, the Advanced Settings tab has an option to set "
+"the number of rows to process by batch. By default this is set to 20. "
+"However, if you are running into errors with an import you may want to "
+"set it to 5 or even 1 in order to troubleshoot and determine the source "
+"of the error."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:203 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:330
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:469 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:614
+msgid "Complete import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:204 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:331
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:470 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:615
+msgid ""
+"Once you have completed mappings, column options, and any settings, click"
+" the Import button in the upper right corner of the browser window. This "
+"should start the import and redirect you to the Past Imports tab. You "
+"should see a confirmation message saying \"Importing in Job ID [number]\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:206
+msgid "Import Item Sets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:207
+msgid ""
+"To import item sets, select \"Item Set\" under the \"Import type\" on the"
+" first page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:221
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:235 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:504
+msgid ""
+"**Item set-specific data** is a checkbox for \"Open to additions.\" Check"
+" to allow other users to edit or add to the item set. Leave unchecked to "
+"have the item set be editable only by its creator, site admins, and "
+"global admins."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:237 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:506
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:241
+msgid ""
+"*Resource template (by label):* set the template for an item set by "
+"name. The name of the template as entered in the spreadsheet and the name"
+" of the template in Omeka S must match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:242
+msgid ""
+"*Resource class (by term):* set the resource class for an item set. The "
+"term for the class in the spreadsheet and in the Omeka S installation "
+"must match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:243
+msgid ""
+"*Owner (by email address):* set an item set's owner by email address. "
+"This must be the email address associated with the user's account in the "
+"Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:244
+msgid ""
+"*Visibility public/private:* set the visibility of the item set. Use "
+"\"private\" or \"public\" in the spreadsheet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:272
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:277 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:416
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:560
+msgid ""
+"When you select one or more rows in the table (columns from your csv "
+"file), you can use the \"Batch edit options\" button to apply the column "
+"options described above to multiple csv columns at once."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:279
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:283
+msgid "Item Set import Basic Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:286
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:288 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:571
+msgid ""
+"**Resource Template:** select a resource template from the drop-down menu"
+" to apply to the imported item sets. You can use the search field at the "
+"top of the dropdown to narrow results or find a particular template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:289 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:572
+msgid ""
+"**Class:** select a class from the drop-down menu to apply to the "
+"imported item sets. You can use the search field at the top of the "
+"dropdown to narrow results or find a particular class."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:290 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:573
+msgid ""
+"**Owner:** set the owner for the item sets by selecting a user from the "
+"drop-down menu. You can use the search field at the top of the dropdown "
+"to narrow results or find a particular user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:291 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:574
+msgid ""
+"**Visibility:** set the visibility of the imported item sets as public "
+"or private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:292
+msgid ""
+"**Open/Closed to additions:** set whether users other than the owner (and"
+" site & global admins) will be able to add or edit the item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:297
+msgid "Item Set import Advanced Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:301
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:316
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:333
+msgid "Import Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:334
+msgid ""
+"To import media, select \"media\" under the \"Import type\" on the first "
+"page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:336
+msgid ""
+"In order to import media, you must have a column in the csv which will "
+"map to item data. Media cannot exist unless associated with an item. Note"
+" that if you are running an advanced job, such as an update or replace, "
+"then you do not have to have a column with associated item data."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:350
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:364 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:508
+msgid ""
+"**Media-specific data** has a dropdown to set the item to which the media"
+" should be added. You can either use the item's internal ID, or any one "
+"of its properties (title, description). A resources' interal ID is the "
+"number sequence at the end of the url when on the view or edit page, so "
+"for `/admin/item/11576` the ID is 11576"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:366 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:510
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:370 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:514
+msgid ""
+"*Resource template (by label):* set the template for the media by name. "
+"The name of the template as entered in the spreadsheet and the name of "
+"the template in Omeka S must match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:371 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:515
+msgid ""
+"*Resource class (by term):* set the resource class for the media. The "
+"term for the class in the spreadsheet and in the Omeka S installation "
+"must match exactly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:372 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:516
+msgid ""
+"*Owner (by email address):* set the media's owner by email address. This "
+"must be the email address associated with the user's account in the Omeka"
+" S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:373 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:517
+msgid ""
+"*Visibility public/private:* set the visibility of the media. Use "
+"\"private\" or \"public\" in the spreadsheet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:377
+msgid ""
+"**Media source** For the column in your spreadsheet which points to the "
+"media you are creating, select which kind of media it is from the "
+"dropdown:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:411
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:418
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:422
+msgid "Media import Basic Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:425
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:427
+msgid ""
+"**Resource Template:** select a resource template from the drop-down menu"
+" to apply to the imported media. You can use the search field at the top "
+"of the dropdown to narrow results or find a particular template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:428
+msgid ""
+"**Class:** select a class from the drop-down menu to apply to the "
+"imported media. You can use the search field at the top of the dropdown "
+"to narrow results or find a particular class."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:429
+msgid ""
+"**Owner:** set the owner for the media by selecting a user from the drop-"
+"down menu. You can use the search field at the top of the dropdown to "
+"narrow results or find a particular user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:430
+msgid ""
+"**Visibility:** set the visibility of the imported media as public or "
+"private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:436
+msgid "Media import Advanced Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:439
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:454
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:472
+msgid "Mixed Resource Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:473
+msgid ""
+"This resource option allows you to import a sheet with a mix of resource "
+"types: items, item sets, and media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:476 ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:623
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays an initial dropdown above a table with the columns from"
+" your spreadsheet as rows. Each row displays:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:485
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:487
+msgid ""
+"The dropdown above the table is where you set which column in the csv "
+"file indicates whether the data in that row is an item, item set, or "
+"media. *You do not need to map this data in the table on this tab*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:489
+msgid "Mapping options TK"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:497
+msgid ""
+"**Properties** select a property to map the column data to, from any of "
+"the installed vocabularies. Use the Filter field to search the available "
+"properties for a specific property. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:512
+msgid "**Generic data** has a dropdown where you can set one of four options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:521
+msgid ""
+"**Media source** For the column in your spreadsheet which points to the "
+"media, select which kind of media it is from the dropdown:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:546
+msgid ""
+"**Use multivalue separator:** check this box to use the multivalue "
+"separator for data in this column. You set the multivalue separator "
+"character in the initial import page, but you can change it in the Basic "
+"Settings tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:549
+msgid "Import as text (default);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:555
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:562
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:566
+msgid "Mixed resources import Basic Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:569
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:575
+msgid ""
+"**Item Set open/Closed to additions:** set whether users other than the "
+"owner (and site & global admins) will be able to add or edit the item "
+"sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:576
+msgid "**Item set for items:** select from a dropdown of existing item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:581
+msgid "Mixed resources import Advanced Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:584
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:599
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:617
+msgid "Import Users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:618
+msgid ""
+"When importing users, you can only bring in data related to the user "
+"table in Omeka S: the user's email, display name, and role. Any "
+"additional data in your CSV will not be imported."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:620
+msgid "Map user import to Omeka S data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:621
+msgid ""
+"This is the only active tab for User import. The Basic and Advanced "
+"settings tabs are present but empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:631
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:633
+msgid ""
+"To map a column header to user information, click on the plus symbol "
+"button to the left of the column header. This will open a drawer on the "
+"right-hand side of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:635
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:637
+msgid "The drawer has a dropdown for Users info, with three options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:639
+msgid "*Email:* the email address for the user;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:640
+msgid "*Display name:* the user's display name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:641
+msgid ""
+"*Role:* the user's [role](../admin/users.md#roles-and-permissions) - for "
+"this column, use the role labels exactly as they appear in Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:643
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:645
+msgid "Once you have completed the mappings, click the Import button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:647
+msgid ""
+"The CSV Import for Users does not have tabs for Basic or Advanced "
+"Settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:649
+msgid "Manage Past Imports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:651
+msgid ""
+"To review past imports, click on the CSV Importer module tab and select "
+"the Past Imports subtab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:653
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:655
+msgid "This will display a table with the following columns:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:657
+msgid "An *Undo* Checkbox"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:658
+msgid "*Date* of import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:659
+msgid ""
+"*Action* of the import (create, append, revise, update, replace, or "
+"delete)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:660
+msgid ""
+"Beneath the action description there are links to the job details and job"
+" log."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:661
+msgid "*Comment* entered on import or indicating an error"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:662
+msgid "*Result* the items updated, added, or deleted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:663
+msgid "*Status* of import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:664
+msgid "Import *Owner*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:666
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:668
+msgid ""
+"To see the details of an import, click the \"Job details\" link below the"
+" action description. To review logs, particularly in cases where an error"
+" occurred, click the \"Log\" link below the action description."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:670
+msgid "Undo an Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:672
+msgid ""
+"To undo an import, click on the CSV Importer module tab and select the "
+"Past Imports subtab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:674
+msgid ""
+"Check the *Undo* box in the row of the import which you want to undo, and"
+" click Submit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:676
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:678
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the size of the import, it may take some time to undo. On "
+"complete, the status of the import on the CSV Importer Past Imports table"
+" will say \"Undone\" followed by the date the import was reversed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:680
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:681
+msgid "The following are known errors that can occur during an import:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:683
+msgid "**Encoding**: CSVs for import must be UTF-8 encoded."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:684
+msgid ""
+"Are your jobs starting and not completing? You might need to [set the "
+"path for PHP](../configuration/) so that your system can perform the "
+"background process to make the items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:686
+msgid "CSV Import with other modules"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:687
+msgid ""
+"Some other modules add functionality to CSV import. If you have these "
+"modules installed and active, you will have access to the following "
+"options when using CSV import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:689
+msgid "Mapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:690
+msgid ""
+"If you have [Mapping](../modules/mapping/) (minimum version 1.1.0) "
+"installed and active, you will have two additional options in the \"Map "
+"to Omeka S data\" tab when importing Items. Note that these options do "
+"not appear for any other import, including Mixed Resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:692
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:694
+msgid ""
+"**Resource location:** set the location for the resource. Your column for"
+" this option can include one of the following forms of data:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:696
+msgid "*Latitude* must be written as a single number (23.43 not 23° 26′)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:697
+msgid ""
+"*Longitude* must be written as a decimal fraction using negative and "
+"positive to indicate west or east. (−91 rather than 91°W)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:698
+msgid ""
+"*Latitude/longitude* must be inputted as numbers separated by a slash, ex"
+" `52.19/ -1.71`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:700
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:702
+msgid ""
+"**Default map view:** sets the default map view for the item to which you"
+" are adding Mapping information."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:704
+msgid ""
+"*Map center latitude* must be written as a single number (23.43 not 23° "
+"26′)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:705
+msgid ""
+"*Map center longitude* must be written as a decimal fraction using "
+"negative and positive to indicate west or east. (−91 rather than 91°W)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:706
+msgid ""
+"*Default zoom* should be a number between 1 (most zoomed out) and 18 "
+"(most zoomed in)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:708
+msgid "File Sideload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:709
+msgid ""
+"If you have [File Sideload](filesideload) (minimum version 1.2.0) "
+"installed and active, you can use it as a source for media when running a"
+" csv import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:711
+msgid ""
+"Everything on the *Map to Omeka S data* tab will be the same. When you "
+"add a mapping and choose the \"Media source\" option, you will see that "
+"there is now an option for \"Sideload\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:713
+msgid ""
+"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:715
+msgid ""
+"For the data in this column, you need to include the full file name, "
+"including extension. So, for example, if you want to import a jpg file "
+"which is named \"Jekyll_and_Hyde_Title\" then the data in the media "
+"column of the csv you are importing should be "
+"`Jekyll_and_Hyde_Title.jpg`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:717
+msgid "Numeric Data Types"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:718
+msgid ""
+"If you have [Numeric Data Types](numericdatatypes) installed and active, "
+"it will add the option to set a column data type as numeric data."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/csvimport.md:720
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/customvocab.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/customvocab.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bc90cecb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/customvocab.po
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:1
+msgid "Custom Vocab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Custom Vocab module allows you to create a controlled vocabulary and "
+"add it to a specific property in a resource template. When using that "
+"template for an item, the property will load with a dropdown limited to "
+"the options of the controlled vocabulary, rather than a text entry box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:5
+msgid "Create a Custom Vocab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Once you have installed and activated the module, go to the Custom Vocab "
+"tab in the left-hand navigation, under the Modules heading."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Click the Add a New Vocab button in the upper right-hand corner of the "
+"window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:11
+msgid ""
+"The Add Cusom Vocab page has four fields: Label, Language, Items, and "
+"Terms."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:13
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:15
+msgid ""
+"*Label* a name for the vocabulary, which you will use to find it when "
+"adding to a resource template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:16
+msgid ""
+"*Language* (optional) of the vocab using the [ISO 639-1 language "
+"code.](http://www.iso.org/iso/language_codes)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:18
+msgid ""
+"You can set the controlled vocabulary terms either to a list of existing "
+"items or to a list of entered terms:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:19
+msgid ""
+"*Items* offers a drop-down of Item Sets in your Omeka S installation. "
+"Choosing one of these will create a custom vocab populated by items from "
+"that item set. When used, the property is populated as an Omeka Resource,"
+" not text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:20
+msgid ""
+"*Terms* for the custom vocab, one word or phrase per line. This populates"
+" the property as text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:22
+msgid "Hit submit to save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:24
+msgid "Manage Custom Vocabs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:26
+msgid ""
+"Once you have created at least one vocabulary, the Custom Vocab module "
+"tab will display a table of your existing vocabularies. The table "
+"displays the *Label*, the buttons for edit, delete, and display "
+"information, and the *Owner* or creator of the vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:28
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:30
+msgid ""
+"When editing a custom vocabulary, you can change the label, language, or "
+"terms."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:32
+msgid "Using a Custom Vocab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Custom Vocabularies are applied through [resource templates](../content"
+"/resource-template.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Go to the Resource Templates and either add new or edit an existing "
+"template. Once you are editing the template:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:38
+msgid "Add the property to which you want to apply the Custom Vocab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:39
+msgid "Edit the property"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:40
+msgid ""
+"In the drawer which opens on the right, go to the Other options section "
+"and find the Data type dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Scroll through the dropdown and select the Custom Vocabulary you want to "
+"use"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:42
+msgid "Click set changes at the bottom of the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:44
+msgid "Be sure to save your changes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:46
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:48
+msgid ""
+"When you click the title of a Resource Template to see its details, the "
+"Custom Vocab will show up in the Data Type table heading."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:50
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:52
+msgid ""
+"When this Resource Template is used in an Item or Item Set, the "
+"designated properties will always load as a drop down menu with the "
+"values from the custom vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:54
+msgid ""
+"In this image, the Resource Template modified earlier is loaded for a new"
+" item. See that Spatial Coverage has a \"select below\" message and "
+"arrows indicating the property input is a drop down menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:56
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:58
+msgid ""
+"This image shows the dropdown open, displaying the values from the \"US "
+"states & territories\" vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/customvocab.md:60
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/dspaceconnector.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/dspaceconnector.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..80d5e52e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/dspaceconnector.po
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:1
+msgid "DSpace Connector"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:3
+msgid ""
+"DSpace Connector is a [module](index.md) for Omeka S which allows you to "
+"connect an Omeka S instance to a DSpace repository to import items from "
+"that repository. In addition to importing information, the Omeka S item "
+"will include a link back to the original item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To install DSpace Connector, follow the instructions for [Installing "
+"Modules](index.md#installing-modules) on the Modules documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:7
+msgid "Note that DSpace Connector only works with DSpace versions 5.6 and higher."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:9
+msgid ""
+"You can view past imports by going to the DSpace Connector tab on the "
+"left-hand navigation of the admin dashboard and clicking the *Past "
+"Imports* sub-tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:11
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:13
+msgid "Import Data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:14
+msgid ""
+"To use DSpace Connector, navigate to the tab labelled *DSpace Connector* "
+"on the left-hand navigation of the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:16
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:18
+msgid "To import from a DSpace Repository:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:20
+msgid "On the first form, enter the following information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:22
+msgid ""
+"*DSpace site URL* for the Repository - note that you have to enter the "
+"entire url, including the `http://` (required);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:23
+msgid ""
+"*Endpoint* for the api (required. by default this is \"rest\" but may be "
+"changed in the DSpace instance);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:24
+msgid "*Limit* or maximum number of results to retrieve at once."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:26
+msgid "Then click *Get collections and communities*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:28
+msgid ""
+"If the information above has been correctly entered, you will proceed to "
+"the DSpace Connector Import Options page. This has three tabs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:30
+msgid "Basic Import Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:31
+msgid "This tab has three options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:33
+msgid ""
+"*Import files into Omeka S*: click this checkbox to import files in "
+"addition to metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:34
+msgid ""
+"*Item Set*: select an item set from the dropdown into which to import the"
+" items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:35
+msgid ""
+"*Ignored Fields*: DSpace metadata fields to ignore on import, separated "
+"by commas."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:36
+msgid "*Comment*: for any comments you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:38
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:40
+msgid "Collections"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:41
+msgid ""
+"This tab will display the list of collections for the DSpace repository, "
+"organized by containing community. You can import either one collection "
+"at a time or the entire DSpace repository."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:43
+msgid ""
+"To import a single collection, click the Import button to the left of its"
+" name. This will automatically begin the import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:45
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:47
+msgid ""
+"To import the entire repository, click 'Import entire repository' at the "
+"top of the form."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:49
+msgid ""
+"**NOTE:** Importing an entire DSpace repository with a large number of "
+"items (>5,000) is likely to flood the DSpace hosting server with requests"
+" until failure. Consider importing collection by collection if at all "
+"possible. If you still wish to import an entire large repository at once,"
+" the following might help:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:51
+msgid ""
+"On the initial Import Settings menu, set *Limit* to a smaller number such"
+" as 50 or 25"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:52
+msgid ""
+"Run the import at night and/or whenever there may be less traffic on your"
+" DSpace server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:53
+msgid ""
+"Consider temporarily inserting a `sleep()` function between the import of"
+" each record in `Import.php` to slow the process down slightly (not "
+"recommended for production)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:55
+msgid ""
+"You can track the status of the import by navigating to the DSpace "
+"Connector > Past Imports tab or on the [Jobs](../admin/jobs.md) tab of "
+"the left-hand navigation on the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:57
+msgid ""
+"Are your jobs starting and not completing? You might need to [set the "
+"path for PHP](../configuration/) so that your system can perform the "
+"background process to make the items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:59
+msgid "Review Imports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:60
+msgid ""
+"Go to the DSpace Connector tab on the left-hand navigation of the admin "
+"dashboard, click on DSpace Connector and then click on Past Imports, "
+"which should appear below the DSpace Connector tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:62
+msgid ""
+"This page displays a table of Past DSpace Imports, with a checkbox option"
+" to *Undo*, the *Job ID* for the import, the repository’s *Dspace "
+"Collection Link*, any *Comments* made during import, the number of "
+"*Items* imported, the *Date* of the import, the import *Status*, and the "
+"*Owner*, or user who initiated the import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:64
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:72
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:66
+msgid "Update Imported Resources"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:67
+msgid ""
+"To update resources created using the DSpace Connector, simply re-run an "
+"import from the same source. The resources will be updated, not "
+"reimported. This allows you to use the Connector to synch data between "
+"your DSpace and Omeka S installations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:69
+msgid "Undo an Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:70
+msgid ""
+"To undo a completed import and remove all associated items, go to the "
+"DSpace Connector tab on the left-hand navigation of the admin dashboard, "
+"click on DSpace Connector and then click on Past Imports, which should "
+"appear below the DSpace Connector tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/dspaceconnector.md:74
+msgid "Check the box for each import you wish to undo and click submit."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/extracttext.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/extracttext.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..34a6757d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/extracttext.po
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:1
+msgid "Extract Text"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Once installed, this module will extract text from files to make them "
+"searchable and machine readable. The extracted text will be added to a "
+"property called \"extracted text\" in a vocabulary unique to that module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:5
+msgid "Supported file formats for this module are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:7
+msgid "doc"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:8
+msgid "docx"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:9
+msgid "html"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:10
+msgid "odt"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:11
+msgid "pdf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:12
+msgid "rtf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:13
+msgid "txt"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:15
+msgid ""
+"Please note that you must have the necessary extractors available on your"
+" server for the module to run for these filetypes. To see which filetypes"
+" will run on your installation, go to the Modules tab on your Omeka S "
+"installation and click the configure button for Extract Text. This will "
+"load a table showing you which extractors are available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:17
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:19
+msgid "The extractors are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:21
+msgid "catdoc, used to extract text from DOC and RTF files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:22
+msgid "docx2txt, used to extract text from DOCX files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:23
+msgid "lynx, used to extract text from HTML files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:24
+msgid "odt2txt, used to extract text from ODT files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:25
+msgid "pdftotext, used to extract text from PDF files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/extracttext.md:26
+msgid "filegetcontents, used to extract text from TXT files."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/fedoraconnector.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/fedoraconnector.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..83f31806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/fedoraconnector.po
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:1
+msgid "Fedora Connector"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Fedora Connector is a [module](../modules/index.md) for Omeka S which "
+"allows you to connect an Omeka S instance to a "
+"[Fedora](https://duraspace.org/fedora/) 4 repository in order to import "
+"items from containers in that repository. In addition to importing "
+"information, the Omeka S item will include a link back to the original "
+"item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To install Fedora Connector, follow the instructions for [Installing "
+"Modules](../modules/index.md#installing-modules) on the Modules "
+"documentation. Following a successful installation you should be "
+"redirected to the configuration page for Fedora Connector."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:7
+msgid "Note that Fedora Connector only works with version 4 of Fedora."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:9
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:10
+msgid ""
+"There are two options for configuring Fedora Connector, both of which "
+"enable the creation of [vocabularies](../content/vocabularies.md) in your"
+" Omeka S install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:12
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:14
+msgid ""
+"The first checkbox offers the option to import the Fedora Vocabulary into"
+" your Omeka S install’s Vocabularies. The second checkbox offers the "
+"option to import the Linked Data Platform Vocabulary into your Omeka S "
+"install’s Vocabularies. If you do so, data in these vocabularies will "
+"also be imported into Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:16
+msgid ""
+"You can check these boxes when you first install Fedora Connector, or at "
+"a later point via the `Configure` button in the "
+"[Modules](../modules/index.md#managing-modules) list"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:18
+msgid "Import Data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:19
+msgid ""
+"To use Fedora Connector, navigate to the tab labelled *Fedora Connector* "
+"on the left-hand navigation of the admin dashboard. This will "
+"automatically take you to the Import sub-tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:23
+msgid "You should see a screen with the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:25
+msgid ""
+"*Fedora Container URI* for the Repository, Collection or Resource you "
+"wish to import (required)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:26
+msgid ""
+"*Import files into Omeka* checkbox, check yes if you want to import media"
+" and other files attached to content (optional, recommended)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:27
+msgid ""
+"*Ignore parent container* checkbox, check yes to only import descendents "
+"of the parent container given in Container URI, not the parent container "
+"itself (optional)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:28
+msgid ""
+"*Import direct descendents only* checkbox, check yes to only import "
+"direct descendents of the container given in Container URI (no children "
+"of children). If unchecked, all resources below container will be "
+"imported recursively (optional)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:29
+msgid ""
+"*Comment* for example, any notes to yourself or other users of the "
+"installation (optional)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:30
+msgid ""
+"*Import into* a selected [Item Set](../content/item-sets.md), if desired "
+"(optional--note that the Item Set must already exist in order to import "
+"into it)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:32
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:34
+msgid ""
+"When the data is complete, press submit. You can track the status of the "
+"import by navigating to the Fedora Connector > Past Imports tab or on the"
+" [Jobs](../admin/jobs.md) tab of the left-hand navigation on the admin "
+"dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Are your jobs starting and not completing? You might need to [set the "
+"path for PHP](../configuration/) so that your system can perform the "
+"background process to make the items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:38
+msgid "Undo an Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:39
+msgid ""
+"To undo a completed import and remove all associated items, go to the "
+"Fedora Connector tab on the left-hand navigation of the admin dashboard, "
+"click on Fedora Connector and then click on Past Imports, which should "
+"appear below the Fedora Connector tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/fedoraconnector.md:41
+msgid "Check the box for each import you wish to undo and click submit."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/filesideload.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/filesideload.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7403a2bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/filesideload.po
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:1
+msgid "File Sideload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:3
+msgid ""
+"This module adds the ability to add media files that are already stored "
+"on the server where your Omeka S installation lives."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:5
+msgid "File Sideload is compatible with [CSV Import](../modules/csvimport.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:7
+msgid "Create a Directory"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Create a directory (folder) on your server. It can be within the File "
+"Sideload module directory or on the same level as the Omeka S "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:11
+msgid ""
+"Upload files into this directory using your File Transfer Protocol (ftp) "
+"client. All files must be in this directory to be accessible; any content"
+" in a subdirectory will not register with the module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Note that when browsing these files from the module to add as media, you "
+"will only see the filenames, so you should name the files as clearly as "
+"possible (\"StudyInScarlet_coverpapge\" is better than \"img001\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:15
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:17
+msgid ""
+"After installing the module, you will need to configure the module to "
+"tell it where the directory is located."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:19
+msgid ""
+"From the modules tab of the left hand navigation, scroll to File Sideload"
+" and click the configure button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:23
+msgid "The File Sideload module has two configuration options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:25
+msgid ""
+"**Sideload Directory**: the complete path, relative to the server root, "
+"of the directory in which the files are stored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:27
+msgid ""
+"If you have shell access to the directory via terminal, you can copy and "
+"paste the results of the command \"pwd\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:28
+msgid ""
+"If you are using a ftp application, copy out the path in the location bar"
+" of the application."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:30
+msgid ""
+"**Delete sideloaded file?** If checked, any file added to an item as "
+"media will be deleted from the sideload directory, as the file is now "
+"saved as media in the Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:32
+msgid ""
+"If unchecked, the files will remain in the directory, and available to be"
+" added as media to any item, until you manually remove them using an ftp "
+"or shell client."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:34
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:36
+msgid "Add a sideload file to an item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:38
+msgid ""
+"With File Sideload installed and configured, and files in the directory, "
+"you can now use the module to add media to items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:40
+msgid ""
+"When editing an item, go to the *Media* tab. The Add New Media sidebar "
+"now includes a button for Sideload (at the very bottom)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:42
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:44
+msgid "Clicking on the button adds a Sideload media block. There are two fields:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:46
+msgid "*Title*: Give the media file a new title (optional)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:47
+msgid ""
+"*File*: select a file from this dropdown menu. The menu will load the "
+"file names as they appear in the directory. Select one from the dropdown "
+"and save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/filesideload.md:49
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/index.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/index.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d21eb9ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/index.po
@@ -0,0 +1,355 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:1
+msgid "Modules Management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:3
+msgid "Modules extend the functionality of your Omeka S installation and sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:5
+msgid "Managing Modules"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:7
+msgid ""
+"To see what modules are installed on your Omeka S site, click on the "
+"Modules link on the left-hand navigation of your [admin dashboard"
+"](../admin-dashboard.md)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Note that only Global Administrators can install and manage modules. Site"
+" Administrators can browse installed modules. Other users do not have "
+"access to this tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:11
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Any modules which have been installed on the Omeka S install should "
+"appear in the list of Modules. Each module displays the name of the "
+"module with the version number, creator, and a summary of its function."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:15
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:18
+msgid ""
+"There are multiple buttons which can appear to the right of a module’s "
+"label. Each button has both an icon and a label describing its action:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:20
+msgid ""
+"*Configure* (a wrench icon): some modules have settings which can be "
+"adjusted. Click this icon to adjust settings for the module in this row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:21
+msgid ""
+"*Activate/Deactivate* (sliding switch): when a module is active, the "
+"slider area background is transparent and the switch is to the left. When"
+" inactive, the background of the slider area background is opaque and the"
+" switch is to the right."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:22
+msgid ""
+"*Install/Uninstall* (arrow and rectangle): use this button to install or "
+"uninstall a module. When the arrow is coming from the rectangle, the "
+"button will uninstall the module. When the arrow is pointing into the "
+"rectangle, the button will install the module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:24
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:26
+msgid ""
+"When a module has a new release, it will display on the browse page with "
+"a message in green stating \"A new version of this module is available. "
+"Get the new version,\" with a link to the download page for the module. "
+"(See updating, below, for more information)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:28
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:30
+msgid "Installing Modules"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:31
+msgid "Add the Module to Omeka S"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:32
+msgid ""
+"In order to appear in the *Modules* table on the Modules tab of the Admin"
+" Dashboard for your Omeka S installation, modules must be manually added "
+"to the modules folder of the installation, using an FTP program or an ssh"
+" connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Modules which have been registered with Omeka are available on the "
+"[Modules](https://omeka.org/s/modules/) page of the Omeka S site. Other "
+"modules may be made available by their authors in other locations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:36
+msgid "To add a module to the site using FTP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:38
+msgid "Download the zipped module to your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:39
+msgid ""
+"Open your FTP client, log on to the server that houses the Omeka S "
+"install and navigate to the `/modules` folder (this should be located in "
+"the main folder of the install)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:40
+msgid "Upload the zipped module to the `/modules` folder"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:41
+msgid "Unzip the module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:43
+msgid ""
+"Please note that if you are downloading the folder for a module from "
+"GitHub rather than the [Module Directory](https://omeka.org/s/modules/), "
+"you need to be sure to download the [latest "
+"release](https://help.github.com/en/articles/linking-to-releases) rather "
+"than the version in active development. If you are unsure how to do this,"
+" please consult the [GitHub help files](https://help.github.com/en)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:45
+msgid ""
+"You can also use ssh to clone a module directly from that module's git "
+"repository. Do this only if you are comfortable with git, github, and "
+"working with ssh."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:47
+msgid "Install the Module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:48
+msgid ""
+"To install a module, navigate to the Modules tab on the left-hand "
+"navigation of the admin dashboard of your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:50
+msgid "Find the module in the table and click the install button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:52
+msgid ""
+"The module is now installed. You should see a success message once the "
+"page reloads. For modules with configuration options, you will be taken "
+"immediately to the configuration page for that module. For all other "
+"modules the Modules page will simply reload. On the Modules page, the "
+"*Status* of the module should change from “Not Installed” to “Not Active”"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:54
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:56
+msgid "Modules are automatically activated when installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:58
+msgid "Activating Module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:59
+msgid ""
+"If you have a module which is installed but inactive, click the activate "
+"button to use the module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:61
+msgid ""
+"You should see a success message once the page reloads, and the *Status* "
+"of the module should change from “Not Active” to “Active”"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:63
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:65
+msgid "Configuring a module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:66
+msgid ""
+"Some, but not all, modules include the option to configure settings for "
+"that module. If an active module displays the *configure* (wrench) "
+"button, you may configure that module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:68
+msgid ""
+"Information regarding configuration options for individual modules can be"
+" found on the documentation page for those modules."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:70
+msgid "Uninstalling a module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:71
+msgid "Removing a module is essentially installing in reverse:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:73
+msgid "Deactivate the module by clicking the *deactivate* button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:74
+msgid "Uninstall the module by clicking the *uninstall* button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:75
+msgid ""
+"A drawer will open on the right side of the window asking you to confirm "
+"that you want to uninstall the module. Click “Confirm Uninstall” to "
+"continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:77
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:79
+msgid ""
+"The uninstalled module will continue to appear on your Modules page "
+"unless the folder for the module is removed from the /modules folder on "
+"the Omeka S installation, which can be done via FTP or SSH."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:81
+msgid "Updating a module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:82
+msgid "To update a module using FTP:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:84
+msgid ""
+"From the Modules tab on your Omeka S installation, deactivate the module "
+"you're going to update."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:85
+msgid ""
+"From the Omeka S website or other source, download the latest release of "
+"zipped module to your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:86
+msgid ""
+"Open your FTP client and log on to the server that houses the Omeka S "
+"install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:87
+msgid ""
+"Navigate to the /modules folder (this should be located in the main "
+"folder of the install)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:88
+msgid ""
+"Move the old copy of the module to your desktop (or somewhere else on "
+"your local machine where you will be able to find it)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:89
+msgid ""
+"Use your FTP client to upload the zipped folder for the latest version of"
+" the module to the /modules folder"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:90
+msgid "In your FTP client, unzip the new version module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:91
+msgid ""
+"On the Omeka S installation dashboard, go to the Modules tab and activate"
+" the new version of the module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:93
+msgid ""
+"If you are concerned about problems with the update, be sure to keep the "
+"older version of the module on your local machine in case you have to "
+"switch them back. You would roll back in the same way you updated."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/index.md:95
+msgid ""
+"If you run into problems while updating, turn on [error "
+"logging](../errorLogging) and post on the [Omeka "
+"Forum](https://forum.omeka.org/c/omeka-s/modules)."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/mapping.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/mapping.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c69a54fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/mapping.po
@@ -0,0 +1,888 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:1
+msgid "Mapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Mapping is a [module](../modules/index.md) for Omeka S which allows you "
+"to geolocate Omeka S items and add interactive maps to [Site "
+"Pages](../sites/site_pages)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To install Mapping, follow the instructions for [Installing "
+"Modules](../modules/index.md#installing-modules) on the Modules "
+"documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:7
+msgid "Mapping is compatible with [CSV Import](../modules/csvimport.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:9
+msgid "Item Mapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:11
+msgid ""
+"To add a map to a new or existing item, click to edit the item. Navigate "
+"to the _Mapping_ tab to add a map to the item. Selecting the tab will "
+"open the map interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:13
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:15
+msgid "Manipulating the Map"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:16
+msgid ""
+"Small white buttons on the left side of the map control and modify the "
+"appearance of the map. Hover over the buttons with the mouse to view "
+"tool-tips."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:18
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:20
+msgid ""
+"**Zoom in**: The small white square with a black plus sign. Each click "
+"zooms in one step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:21
+msgid ""
+"**Zoom out**: The small white square with black minus sign. Each click "
+"zooms out one step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:22
+msgid ""
+"**Draw a Marker**: The small white square with black bubble marker. When "
+"you click the button your pointer becomes a blue marker. Click again on "
+"the map to place the marker."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:23
+msgid ""
+"**Move Marker**: The small white square with black box and pencil icon. "
+"This option is only available after a marker has been added. Click the "
+"button and a pink box appears around each marker. Click a marker to move "
+"it. Click again to place. Use the grey buttons to _Save_ or _Cancel_."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:24
+msgid ""
+"**Delete Marker**: The small white button with a trashcan icon. This "
+"option is only available after a marker has been added. Click the icon to"
+" select a marker. Click the marker to be removed and it will disappear. "
+"Use the grey buttons to _Save_ or _Cancel_ these changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:25
+msgid ""
+"**Search Address**: The small white square with a black magnifying glass "
+"icon. Click to enter an address in the search bar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:26
+msgid ""
+"**Set the current view as default view**: The small white square with a "
+"target or crosshair symbol. The map will default to a zoomed out (global)"
+" view. Click to set the current view as the default view for this item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:27
+msgid ""
+"**Go to current default view**: The small black square with a black box "
+"around a dot. The This option is only available after you have set a "
+"default view. Click to pan and zoom map to the selected view for this "
+"item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:28
+msgid ""
+"**Clear the default center and zoom level**: The small white square with "
+"a black \"X\". This option is only available after you have set a default"
+" view. Click to clear pan and zoom preferences and return to the initial "
+"global view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:30
+msgid ""
+"In addition to these options, you can also navigate the map using your "
+"mouse or trackpad by scrolling to zoom and clicking and dragging to pan."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:32
+msgid "Adding locations to an item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:33
+msgid "In order to add a location to an item, go to the Mapping tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:35
+msgid ""
+"To find the point where you want to locate the marker, you can do one of "
+"the following:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:37
+msgid "Zoom and drag to find the location."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:38
+msgid "Type the place name into the Search Address field (see Figure 4 below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:39
+msgid ""
+"Note that this will populate as you type, and will not search locations "
+"which do not match the formatting of the search function."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:40
+msgid ""
+"Enter latitude and longitude coordinates into the search box. These "
+"should be formatted as decimals, for example `38.897222, -77.064167`, not"
+" `38° 53′ 50″ N, 77° 3′ 51″ W`"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:42
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:44
+msgid ""
+"Click on the *Draw a Marker* tool in the right hand toolbar. Your cursor "
+"will become a marker which can move around the map. To set the point, "
+"click on the map."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:46
+msgid ""
+"![Mapping tab with an active marker being drawn. The marker has a tooltip"
+" saying \"click map to place marker\"](../modules/modulesfiles/Mapping-"
+"drawMarker.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:48
+msgid ""
+"You can now click on the marker to add a label which will display on "
+"[public map views](#public-view) of the item. Be aware that this will "
+"display in a large font."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:50
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:52
+msgid ""
+"When you are adding a label, you can also add an image to display on the "
+"marker when clicked in the [public view](#public-view). You can only "
+"select from images which has already been [attached to the item as "
+"media](../content/items.md#media). To remove the image, select \"no "
+"Image\" from the sidebar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:54
+msgid ""
+"![Marker selected with Image added. The media is also visible in the "
+"sidebar, along with an option for \"no image\"](../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/Mapping-addImage.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:56
+msgid "Editing markers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:57
+msgid ""
+"To edit the label or image, simply click on the marker. This will open "
+"the options for the label and image, as seen above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:59
+msgid ""
+"To **move a marker** you have added, use the \"Move marker\" button on "
+"the left hand toolbar (small white square with black box and pencil "
+"icon). Any marker on the map will become highlighted in a red, dotted-"
+"line outline. Click and drag the marker you want to move."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:61
+msgid ""
+"To apply your changes, click the \"Save\" option which opens from the "
+"\"Move marker\" button. To cancel the changes, click \"Cancel.\" If you "
+"do not click save, the marker will not be moved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:63
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:65
+msgid ""
+"To **delete a marker**, first click the \"Delete a marker\" in the left "
+"hand toolbar (trash can icon). Click on the marker you want to delete; "
+"this will remove the marker from the map. In order to make the deletion "
+"permanent, you must click Save in the menu which opens from the \"Delete "
+"a marker\" button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:67
+msgid ""
+"Note that you can use the \"clear all\" button in the menu which opens "
+"form the \"delete a marker\" button to clear all markers on the map."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:69
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:71
+msgid "Adding Map blocks to a site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:72
+msgid ""
+"There are two kinds of Mapping blocks which you can add to your site: Map"
+" by attachments, where you manually add resources to the map block; and "
+"Map by query, which allows you to use a search string to add resources to"
+" the map block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:74
+msgid ""
+"To add a map to a new or existing page, click to edit the page. On the "
+"right, under _Add New Block_ , click the _Map_ tab to add a map to the "
+"item (1). Selecting the tab will open the map block to the page (2). This"
+" block includes customizable features for the map in collapsable panes. "
+"Click the triangle to expand or collapse these fields (3)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:76
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:78
+msgid ""
+"The *Map by attachments* and *Map by query* blocks have largely the same "
+"settings, with the exception of the final option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:80
+msgid "Default View"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:81
+msgid ""
+"This section lets you set the appearance and zoom level of the map. There"
+" are three fields and a preview map. Within the preview map are buttons "
+"which you can use to set the default zoom and location of the map. If you"
+" do not set a default zoom or location, the map will adjust to display "
+"all resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:83
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:85
+msgid ""
+"*Basemap provider:* select from a dropdown of basemaps. Once selected, "
+"the preview map will update to show you the appearance of that map. The "
+"default is OpenStreetMap.Mapnik."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:87
+msgid ""
+"Minimum zoom level:* set the minimum zoom for the map. Fully zoomed out "
+"is 0."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:89
+msgid ""
+"Maximum zoom level: set the maximum possible zoom level. The highest is "
+"19. Some basemaps do not function at higher levels; you will want to "
+"check to be sure you set your maximum at a level where you basemap is "
+"visible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:91
+msgid ""
+"Between the fields and the preview map is a message which tells you the "
+"current zoom level, as you zoom using the plus and minus buttons on the "
+"preview map or the scroll on your comptuer. Use this to help you "
+"determine where you want to set your minimum and maximum zoom levels."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:93
+msgid "Within the preview map, there are five buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:95
+msgid ""
+"*Zoom in:* The small white square with a black plus sign. Each click "
+"zooms in one step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:96
+msgid ""
+"*Zoom out:* The small white square with black minus sign. Each click "
+"zooms out one step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:97
+msgid ""
+"*Set the current view as default view:* The small white square with a "
+"target or crosshair symbol. The map will default to a global view. Click "
+"to set the current view as the default view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:98
+msgid ""
+"*Go to current default view:* The small black square with a black box "
+"around a dot. This option is only available after a default view has been"
+" set. Click to pan and zoom map to the selected view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:99
+msgid ""
+"*Clear the default center and zoom level:* The small white square with a "
+"black \"X\". Click to clear pan and zoom preferences and return to the "
+"initial global view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:101
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:103
+msgid "WMS Overlays"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:105
+msgid ""
+"Add, edit, and delete [Web Map Service "
+"(WMS)](https://mapserver.org/ogc/wms_server.html) overlays."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:107
+msgid ""
+"*Label:* Create a unique, descriptive label for the map overlay. This "
+"will be visible to visitors and should be used to differentiate between "
+"overlays."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:108
+msgid "*Base URL:* Add a URL to the WMS map."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:109
+msgid "*Layers:* Any layers you wish to use, separated by commas."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:110
+msgid "*Styles:* Any styles you wish to use, separated by commas."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:112
+msgid ""
+"Click Add Overlay to create the overlay. Click _Clear Inputs_ to clear "
+"each of the fields. Multiple overlays can be added."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:114
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:116
+msgid ""
+"Once you have added an overlay, it will appear above the fields for "
+"adding overlays."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:118
+msgid ""
+"Choose a default overlay by checking the box next to it. Edit an overlay "
+"by clicking on on the red pencil edit button, or click the red trashcan "
+"icon to delete the overlay."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:120
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:122
+msgid "Timeline"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:123
+msgid ""
+"Timeline adds a timeline display to the left of the map view. Note that "
+"this feature requires the "
+"[NumericDataTypes](../modules/numericdatatypes/) module and at least one "
+"item that has a property with a Timestamp or Interval value (applied via "
+"the [resource template](../content/resource-template))."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:125
+msgid ""
+"*Title headline:* displays on the first slide of the timeline (see "
+"[\"Timeline public view\"](#timeline-public-view) below). You can use "
+"this to name the timeline."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:126
+msgid ""
+"*Title text:* appears below the title headline on the first slide of the "
+"timeline (see [\"Timeline public view\"](#timeline-public-view) below). "
+"You can use this to provide context or narrative introduction for the "
+"timeline."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:127
+msgid ""
+"*Fly to:* is a dropdown menu where you can set the zoom level for each "
+"point in the timeline on the map. Your options are default view, or zoom "
+"levels 0-18 (even numbers only). The higher the number, the more zoomed "
+"in the map will be."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:128
+msgid ""
+"Note that the transition between points is animated, so if you have very "
+"distant points the shift between them will involve a significant zoom out"
+" and in."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:129
+msgid ""
+"*Show contemporaneous events:* sets how two events with the same "
+"timestamp or interval are displayed. If checked, contemporaneous events "
+"will both display in the map when active in the story slider."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:130
+msgid ""
+"For timestamp properties, if two events have a date of \"1 January "
+"2000,\" both events will show on the map when either is in the story "
+"slider."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:131
+msgid ""
+"For interval properties, if one event has an interval of \"28 July 1914 -"
+" 11 November 1918\" and another has an interval of \"January 1819- "
+"December 1920\" both events will show on the map when either is in the "
+"story slider."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:132
+msgid ""
+"Note that this setting only works with the default view of Timeline "
+"navigation position."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:133
+msgid ""
+"*Timeline navigation position:* by default, the timeline displays with "
+"the story slider, to the left of the map. Using this dropdown, you can "
+"change where the story slider displays. Options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:134
+msgid "Default position"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:135
+msgid "Full width, below story slider and map"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:136
+msgid "Full width, above story slider and map"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:137
+msgid ""
+"*Property:* a dropdown menu; select the timestamp or interval property to"
+" use when populating the timeline. The dropdown menu will populate with "
+"the properties which have been defined in a resource type as using "
+"numeric data types Interval or Timestamp."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:138
+msgid ""
+"You may want to make a note of which property and numeric data type you "
+"are using before creating the map block. The dropdown only displays the "
+"term and data type but not which template it is associated with, for "
+"example `Date Created (numeric:timestamp)`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:139
+msgid ""
+"Noted that you can only select *one* property per timeline. You cannot "
+"mix timestamp and interval data."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:141
+msgid ""
+"![Mapping block with all options collapsed except Timeline, which shows "
+"options as described, all empty](../modules/modulesfiles/mapping-"
+"timelineBlock.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:143
+msgid ""
+"To remove the timeline from a map block, click the X on the far right of "
+"the Property dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:145
+msgid ""
+"To see how the various settings of the timeline block appear on the "
+"public side, please see the [Timeline Public View](#timeline-public-view)"
+" section below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:147
+msgid "Attachments (Map by attachments block)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:149
+msgid "Markers are added to the map using _Items_."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:151
+msgid ""
+"Click _Add Attachment_ (1) to select them from a list on the right (2). "
+"Note: This list will only be populated by items that have at least one "
+"location added to them (when editing the item)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:152
+msgid "Clicking an item adds it to a list in the Attachments pane (3)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:153
+msgid "Click and drag items in this list to reorder them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:154
+msgid "Delete items by clicking the red trashcan."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:156
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:158
+msgid ""
+"To add multiple items at once, click the \"quick add\" slider just above "
+"the list of items in the right hand drawer. This will add a checkbox to "
+"the left of each item. Check the boxes of those items you want to add to "
+"the map, then click the \"Add selected\" button at the bottom of the "
+"drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:160
+msgid ""
+"![Drawer with bulk add option activated](../modules/modulesfiles/Mapping-"
+"bulkAttachments.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:162
+msgid "Query (Map by query)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:163
+msgid ""
+"In order to use this block, you will need to run a query, or search, in "
+"your items. From the search results page, copy everything in your "
+"browser's address bar starting with the question mark all the way to the "
+"end of the search url (to the right)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:165
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:167
+msgid ""
+"Paste the query string into the Query field in the Map by query block. "
+"Note that at no point will items display on the admin side. You will need"
+" to go to the public view to see the items which result from your query."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:169
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:171
+msgid "Public view"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:172
+msgid ""
+"A map block will display on a public page at full page width. If you have"
+" settings in the [default view](#default-view) of the block, these should"
+" be applied. Otherwise the block will zoom so that all of the items are "
+"visible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:174
+msgid ""
+"Viewers can zoom either using the scroll function of their computer or "
+"the Zoom in/out buttons on the left side of the map."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:176
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:178
+msgid ""
+"Each item will display as a marker on the map. Markers which are close "
+"together will display as a cluster circle, with a number indicating how "
+"many items share that location. As you zoom in, these clusters may break "
+"open."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:180
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on a marker will open a label for that marker. If you have not "
+"added a label or image for the marker, it will simply say \"view item.\" "
+"If you have added a label, it will show the label, as well as "
+"representative media and a link to the media if the marker has one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:182
+msgid ""
+"Item mapping marker with label only: ![](../modules/modulesfiles/mapping-"
+"publicLabel.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:185
+msgid ""
+"Item mapping marker with label and image: ![](../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/mapping-publicLabelImg.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:188
+msgid ""
+"Item mapping marker with no label or image: ![](../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/mapping-publicNoLabel.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:191
+msgid "Timeline Public view"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:192
+msgid ""
+"On the public side, the timeline will display to the left of the map, or "
+"above the map on mobile views. Each item appears on both the map and the "
+"timeline."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:194
+msgid ""
+"On a map block with timeline, the block initially loads with the map "
+"either at default view or zoomed to display all markers. The timeline "
+"will display the title headline and text, as seen below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:196
+msgid ""
+"![Map block with timeline, displaying the first slide of the timeline. "
+"There are two lines of text, a larger font reading \"Title Headline\" and"
+" below it smaller font reading \"title text\".](../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/mapping-timelinePublic1.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:198
+msgid ""
+"In the timeline half of the display, information appears on the top and "
+"the timeline on the bottom. The timeline viewer has zoom buttons which "
+"increase or decrease the horizontal display of time (zoom in for year by "
+"year, zoom out to see decades at once). The arrow below them returns the "
+"viewer to the title slide."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:200
+msgid ""
+"When mousing over the timeline, the cursor changes to a four-directional "
+"arrow. Viewers can hold and drag left and right to scroll through the "
+"timeline. They can also navigate between items using the semi-opaque "
+"right and left arrows on the information area of the display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:202
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on a maker will display that item's date or interval, title, "
+"description, and attached image. The information area has a scroll bar "
+"for longer material. The title acts as a link to the item's show page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:204
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:206
+msgid ""
+"Whenever an item is selected, its marker in the timeline will show up "
+"with a highlight to indicate that it is active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:208
+msgid ""
+"**Numeric:Interval appearance** Interval properties display as a long bar"
+" running horizontally across the timeline, with bars reaching down to the"
+" timeline at the start and end dates of the interval. Overlapping "
+"intervals will stack."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:211
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:213
+msgid ""
+"**Numeric:Timestamp appearance** Timestamp properties display as a flag "
+"on the timeline, with one bar anchoring them to the timeline. Items which"
+" overlap either due to date or long text will stack."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:216
+msgid ""
+"![Timestamp timeline showing markers for the births of Cassandra and Jane"
+" Austen in the 1770s](../modules/modulesfiles/mapping-"
+"timelinePublic4.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:218
+msgid ""
+"**Timeline navigation position** If you select \"full width, below story "
+"slider and map\" in the \"Timeline navigation position\" dropdown, the "
+"timeline and map will display as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:221
+msgid ""
+"![Timeline start page slide, with the timeline displaying full width "
+"below the map and story slider](../modules/modulesfiles/mapping-"
+"timelinePublicBelow.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:223
+msgid ""
+"If you select \"full width, above story slider and map\", the display "
+"will be similar but with the timeline above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:225
+msgid ""
+"**Show contemporaneous events** When \"show contemporaneous events\" is "
+"checked, the map zooms to display all events which take place on the same"
+" day."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:228
+msgid ""
+"In the image below, the timeline is using interval data. The event "
+"\"Reading Abbey Girls' School\" (March 1785 - December 1786) takes place "
+"within the same period as \"Steventon Rectory\" (1775-1801), so the map "
+"is zoomed out to display the location markers for both events."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:230
+msgid ""
+"![image as described](../modules/modulesfiles/mapping-"
+"timelinePublicSCE.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:232
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/mapping.md:233
+msgid ""
+"If you would like to remove the mapping location from an item, you must "
+"delete all the map modifications. First, click to delete each marker "
+"(click the Delete a Marker button, select the marker, click to save) and "
+"then click to clear the default center and zoom level (click the Clear "
+"the default and zoom level button. The map will return to a global view)."
+" Click to save the item and confirm that the map no longer appears."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..42f267ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/metadatabrowse.po
@@ -0,0 +1,321 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:1
+msgid "Metadata Browse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Metadata Browse module makes it possible to browse all resources that"
+" share a value for a particular metadata property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:5
+msgid ""
+"It does this by adding a link below selected properties that reads \"See "
+"all items with this value\"; when clicked, the module returns the results"
+" of that search (property value is equal to input). In function it is "
+"similar to the Omeka Classic plugin [Search by Metadata](http://omeka.org"
+"/add-ons/plugins/search-by-metadata/)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:7
+msgid ""
+"The module's browse function is applied on the admin side when the module"
+" is active, and can be enabled on the public side of individual sites, "
+"on a site-by-site basis."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:9
+msgid "Configuration Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:10
+msgid ""
+"Once you have installed and activated the module, you can configure it "
+"from the Modules tab of the left-hand navigation. Click the Configure "
+"button, with the wrench icon, to the right of the Metadata Browse label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:12
+msgid ""
+"The module has two checkbox configuration options, Global Configuration "
+"and Direct Links. If Use global configuration is checked, you will also "
+"be able to select properties from a right-hand sidebar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:14
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:16
+msgid "Global Configuration checkbox"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:17
+msgid ""
+"The \"Use global configuration on admin side\" checkbox determines how "
+"the properties available for *admin side* metadata browsing (on items and"
+" item sets views) are determined: by aggregating the properties selected "
+"on all of the sites in the installation (unchecked) or limited to only "
+"the properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:19
+msgid ""
+"When the box is *unchecked*, metadata browse on the admin side (and only "
+"the admin side) aggregates the metadata browse settings for all "
+"individual sites and applies them to every item and item set in the "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:21
+msgid ""
+"Leaving the box unchecked allows installation users to browse the "
+"properties on the admin side which they have set as key on their sites. "
+"For example, a site about various artists might have the Metadata Browse "
+"enabled for 'Creator' (Dublin Core), while a site collecting conference "
+"papers might enable Metadata Browse for 'presented at' (Bibliographic "
+"Ontology); with the box unchecked, both 'Creator' and 'presented at' "
+"would have Metadata Browse enabled on the admin views of all items and "
+"item sets on the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:23
+msgid ""
+"When the box is *checked*, individual site settings still apply on the "
+"public views of those sites, but are not used on the admin side. Instead,"
+" only those properties selected in the Metadata Browse module "
+"configuration settings (the current page) are used on the admin side. So "
+"if the global admin of the installation example above checked the Global "
+"Configuration box and only enabled the properties 'Title' and 'Creator', "
+"then the 'presented at' property would not include a \"See all items with"
+" this value\" option on the admin side item browse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:25
+msgid ""
+"Checking the box can be used to limit the number of properties which have"
+" Metadata Browse enabled on the admin side. If, for example, the site "
+"about various artists mentioned above was using Metadata Browse on every "
+"possible property, those Metadata Browse links would still be visible on "
+"their site, but would not show up on the admin side. Instead, the Global "
+"Administrator(s) could decided which properties to enable browsing on for"
+" the admin side, thus reducing visual clutter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:27
+msgid "Direct Links checkbox"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:28
+msgid ""
+"The \"Direct Links\" checkbox sets how metadata browse links are "
+"displayed on both the admin side and across all sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:30
+msgid ""
+"If this box is unchecked, the properties which have been selected for "
+"metadata browse will display with a red textual link under them which "
+"reads \"see all items with this value\". Clicking on the link text opens "
+"the page of items with matching metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:32
+msgid ""
+"In this example, metadata browse is active for the \"Date of "
+"Publication\" property:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:34
+msgid ""
+"![The item *Sense and Sensibility*. The date property has text as "
+"described, and is indicated with a blue arrow.](../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/mdbr-directlinkNo.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:36
+msgid ""
+"If this box is checked, the values of the properties themselves become "
+"the link, similar to how a property populated by a resource displays. In "
+"this case, clicking on the property value itself opens the page of items "
+"with matching metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:38
+msgid ""
+"![The item *Sense and Sensibility*. The date property displays as a link,"
+" and is indicated with a blue arrow.](../modules/modulesfiles/mdbr-"
+"directlinkYes.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:40
+msgid "Choose properties"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Selecting properties for Metadata Browse in the Module configuration will"
+" only work if the *use global configuration* checkbox is checked (see "
+"[above](#global-configuration-checkbox))."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:43
+msgid ""
+"Select the properties from the sidebar by clicking on the desired "
+"property. It will load under the prompt \"Choose properties\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:45
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:47
+msgid ""
+"To remove a property simply click the trash can/delete icon to the right "
+"of the property label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:49
+msgid "Admin side browse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:51
+msgid ""
+"Once you have selected properties for Metadata Browse, either in the "
+"configuration for the module or on at least one site, you will be able to"
+" search for exact matches to item and item set properties on the admin "
+"side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:53
+msgid ""
+"When viewing the metadata of any item (not when editing), you will be "
+"able to browse those properties as exact match for any other item in the "
+"installation with that value in that property. If the direct [direct link"
+" checkbox](#direct-links-checkbox) is active, these properties will "
+"display as links; if not, they will display with the text \"see all items"
+" with this value\" just below the value for the property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:55
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:58
+msgid "Metadata Browse on Sites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:59
+msgid ""
+"Once the module is activated and installed, it will show up in the "
+"context menu for [sites](../sites/index.md) on your installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:61
+msgid ""
+"To set up Metadata Browse for a site, click on the Metadata Browse tab in"
+" the site's context menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:63
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:65
+msgid ""
+"On the page which loads, select properties from the sidebar to enable "
+"metadata browse by clicking on them in the sidebar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:67
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:69
+msgid ""
+"Delete any selected properties by clicking the trash can/delete icon. If "
+"you accidentally click the delete button, simply click the undo button "
+"which replaces it to keep that property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:71
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:73
+msgid "Remember to click the *Save* button to save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:75
+msgid "Public View"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:76
+msgid ""
+"Once you have selected properties and saved changes, visitors to your "
+"site can use the Metadata Browse properties to search for all items on "
+"the site with matching properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:78
+msgid ""
+"The browse will either display with the property as a link or with the "
+"link text \"see all items with this value\", depending on whether the "
+"[direct link checkbox](#direct-links-checkbox) in the global module "
+"configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:80
+msgid ""
+"In the example below, Metadata Browse is available for Title, Date of "
+"Publication, and Publisher, and Direct Links is not active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:82
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:84
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on \"See all items with this value\" under creator takes a "
+"visitor to a page of exact match search results. For example, this is the"
+" result for clicking \"see all items with this value\" for the Publisher "
+"property in the previous image:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/metadatabrowse.md:86
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..35248544
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/numericdatatypes.po
@@ -0,0 +1,428 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:1
+msgid "Numeric Data Types"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:3
+msgid ""
+"This module allows you to set certain properties as numeric data, using "
+"resource templates. You can designate properties as either date and time "
+"(ISO) or integers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To install Numeric Data Types, follow the instructions for [Installing "
+"Modules](../modules/index.md#installing-modules) on the Modules "
+"documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:7
+msgid "Create numeric properties"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:8
+msgid ""
+"To implement the module, you will need to create or edit a [resource "
+"template](../content/resource-template.md) to set specific properties as "
+"having numeric data types."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:10
+msgid ""
+"When creating or editing a resource template, find the property you want "
+"to set as numeric in the right hand sidebar. Click on the property to add"
+" it to the template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:12
+msgid ""
+"Once the property has been added to the template, click the pencil/edit "
+"icon to edit the property. In the right hand drawer which opens, look for"
+" the dropdown \"Data type\" under the heading \"Other options\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:14
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:16
+msgid ""
+"In the dropdown, select from the following options under the heading for "
+"\"Numeric\":"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:18
+msgid ""
+"Timestamp, which can be as broad as year or as defined as the date and "
+"time;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:19
+msgid "Integer, a whole number;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:20
+msgid ""
+"Duration, for how long something lasted, with options for years down to "
+"seconds;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:21
+msgid ""
+"Interval, a date-based range with start and end dates in each instance of"
+" the property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:23
+msgid ""
+"Be sure to click \"set changes\" at the bottom of the drawer to save this"
+" setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:25
+msgid ""
+"When you save changes to your resource template, the numeric type you "
+"chose should show up in the column \"Data type\" for the template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:27
+msgid ""
+"![Newly created resource template with a green-highlighted update success"
+" message. There are four properties - Title, Description, Date, and "
+"Spatial Coverage. In the column for Data Type, Date has Timestamp type "
+"and Spatial Coverage has Integer.](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"review.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:29
+msgid ""
+"Note: these fields will display only the numeric data entered. If you "
+"want to indicate what the integers represent, edit the property's label "
+"to include the scale you are using, for example creating an alternate "
+"label for \"Spatial Coverage\" which reads \"Height (cm)\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:31
+msgid "Add numeric data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:32
+msgid ""
+"When you add or edit an item using the template you created above, the "
+"properties you set as numeric will appear as follows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:34
+msgid "Timestamp data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:35
+msgid ""
+"A Timestamp property automatically loads with fields for Year, Month, and"
+" Day. Note that the Month input is a dropdown where you select from the "
+"months' names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:37
+msgid "If you enter a day without a month, the day information will not be saved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:39
+msgid ""
+"![Empty timestamp fields, for property Date](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"timestamp1.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the \"time\" button to the right of the day input field will "
+"load additional dropdown fields for Hour, Minute, and Second. Note that "
+"there is no AM/PM option so you will want to use twenty-four hour time "
+"entries (14 for 2pm, etc)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:43
+msgid ""
+"![Empty timestamp fields, for property Date, with a row of time entry "
+"options below the date entry options](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"timestamp2.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:45
+msgid "Entries must be whole numbers, with no decimal points."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:47
+msgid "Integer data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:48
+msgid ""
+"An integer property has a narrow input which, once you have data in it, "
+"will display up and down arrows on the right hand side to increase or "
+"decrease the value."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:50
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:52
+msgid ""
+"Your entry must be whole number; decimal points are not supported and "
+"will be rounded up to the nearest number."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:54
+msgid "Duration data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:55
+msgid ""
+"A Duration property has a series of fields in which to enter the duration"
+" of the resource. There are fields for:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:57
+msgid "Years"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:58
+msgid "Months"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:59
+msgid "Days"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:60
+msgid "Hours"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:61
+msgid "Minutes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:62
+msgid ""
+"Seconds By default, only the first three of these fields display. "
+"Clicking on the \"time\" button to the right of the day input field will "
+"load the fields for Hour, Minute, and Second. Note that there is no AM/PM"
+" option so you will want to use twenty-four hour time entries (14 for "
+"2pm, etc)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:65
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:67
+msgid ""
+"You do not need to enter every field. For example, you can enter a "
+"duration of 1 year and 5 days, leaving the month field blank."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:69
+msgid "Interval data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:70
+msgid ""
+"Interval data allows you to enter the beginning and end dates for a "
+"resource. There are two sets of timestamp fields, one for the start date "
+"and one for the end."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:72
+msgid ""
+"![Interval property with no times entered](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"interval.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:74
+msgid "Sort"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:75
+msgid ""
+"Once you have active resource templates using numeric data types, you can"
+" use these to sort on the Item, Media, and Item Set browse views."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:77
+msgid ""
+"Click the first dropdown on the upper right above the table of resources,"
+" which defaults to \"Created\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:79
+msgid ""
+"![A closeup of the options above the resource table, with a red arrow "
+"points to the \"created\" dropdown option\"](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"browsesort1.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:81
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on this dropdown will reveal multiple options, including all of "
+"the properties using numeric data types. These options display as the "
+"property with the data type in parentheses, for example \"Date "
+"(numeric:timestamp)\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:83
+msgid ""
+"![The contents of the dropdown, with the normal options in addition to "
+"eight properties using numeric data types.](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-"
+"browsesort2.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:86
+msgid "Bulk edit numeric data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:87
+msgid ""
+"The module adds an additional option to the [item batch "
+"edit](../content/items.md#batch-actions): convert to numeric."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:89
+msgid ""
+"![Batch edit items form with a red rectangle outline surrounding the "
+"convert to numeric option](../modules/modulesfiles/ndt-batchoption"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:91
+msgid ""
+"The convert to numeric option lets you convert an existing text input "
+"property to a numeric data type. It will not work on properties where the"
+" data is currently an Omeka resource or a URI."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:93
+msgid ""
+"In the first field, select a property from the dropdown. You can type to "
+"search through the properties. Note that this dropdown loads the property"
+" names from the vocabulary and will not have the additional labels from "
+"your resource template, so be sure you know which vocabulary term you are"
+" looking for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:95
+msgid "In the second field, select from the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:97
+msgid "convert to timestamp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:98
+msgid "convert to interval"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:99
+msgid "convert to duration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:100
+msgid "convert to integer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:102
+msgid "Search numeric data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:103
+msgid ""
+"When the module is active, it adds additional search options to the "
+"Advanced Search for items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:105
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:107
+msgid ""
+"For each search option, you must select a specific property from the "
+"dropdown; if you are using Duration in two resource templates, one for "
+"film (ex `time:hasDuration`) and one for events (ex, `dcterms:extent`), "
+"you would need to select the correct property from the resource template "
+"which you want to search. The dropdown will display the original property"
+" labels (`Extent` or `hasDuration` in the examples above). If you hover "
+"over the properties in the dropdown, it will show you the resource "
+"templates which are using that property and to which the search will "
+"apply."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:110
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:113
+msgid ""
+"**Timestamp** data has two search options, one for \"Date comes before\" "
+"and \"Date comes after\". Select the property for timestamp from the "
+"dropdown - only properties which are being used for timestamp will appear"
+" in the dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:115
+msgid ""
+"**Duration** data, like timestamp data, has two options, for Duration is "
+"greater than and duration is less than. After selecting the property you "
+"want to search on, enter values for years, months, days, hours, minutes, "
+"or seconds."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:117
+msgid ""
+"**Date in interval** searches for a date within an interval. When "
+"searching on an interval, be as precise as possible. Because of the way "
+"that the module stores timestamps, the date you are searching must fall "
+"*within* the interval. So a search for the year 1814 would not turn up an"
+" event with interval September 12-15, 1814, because of the way the data "
+"reads the two dates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/numericdatatypes.md:119
+msgid ""
+"**Integer** data is searchable with \"Value is less than\" and \"Value is"
+" greater than.\" As with the timestamp data, only properties which have "
+"numeric data will load in the dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/omeka2importer.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/omeka2importer.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..366a56f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/omeka2importer.po
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:1
+msgid "Omeka 2 Importer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Omeka 2 Importer module which enables you to import items from an "
+"Omeka 2.x site into an Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:5
+msgid ""
+"For information on installing, see the instructions on the general "
+"modules page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Once installed, the Omeka 2 Importer module should appear toward the "
+"bottom of the left navigation menu on the main admin dashboard. When "
+"selected, there are sub-menu items for *Import* and *Past Imports*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:9
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:11
+msgid "**Notes**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:13
+msgid ""
+"the module only imports Dublin Core metadata, Item Type metadata, and "
+"files. It *will not* import tags, Geolocation data, Simple Page content,"
+" or Exhibit Builder content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:14
+msgid ""
+"Because resource properties in Omeka S do not have HTML formatting, any "
+"html in your Omeka Classic item properties (links, text formatting, etc) "
+"will be stripped during the import process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:16
+msgid "Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:18
+msgid "From the Import tab you can start new imports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:20
+msgid ""
+"**Note** You must have API enabled on the source Omeka installation for "
+"the importer to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:22
+msgid "Enter the API"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:23
+msgid ""
+"On the first page of the importer, enter the *Omeka 2 Api Endpoint* - the"
+" site URL for the API you wish to access (it should end with api). Make "
+"sure you enter the full url, beginning with http, otherwise the importer "
+"will not be able to access the items at that site. Click *next*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:25
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:27
+msgid ""
+"If you have entered a valid API endpoint, the next page will load with no"
+" issue. If you have entered an invalid endpoint, the module will display "
+"error messages “Warning: Invalid argument”."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:29
+msgid "Import Settings and Map Metadata"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:30
+msgid ""
+"On the second page of the importer there are tabs for basic import "
+"settings, mapping Omeka Classic elements to Omeka S properties, and "
+"mapping Omeka Classic item types to Omeka S classes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:32
+msgid ""
+"Move between all three tabs to ensure that the data is mapped as you want"
+" and the settings are correct before clicking Import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Clicking the Start Over button will take you back to the API import url "
+"field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:36
+msgid "Basic Import Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:37
+msgid ""
+"*Omeka 2 Api Key*: This field can either be blank or filled, depending on"
+" whether you have an API key for the site you are attempting to import "
+"data from."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:38
+msgid ""
+"*Comment*: You can add a comment such as “Jane Doe’s API, no key” to help"
+" identify the specific import when viewing previous imports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:39
+msgid ""
+"*Import Into*: This option allows you to select the item set into which "
+"you want to import the items. Note that you can only import into item "
+"sets which you own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:40
+msgid ""
+"*Per Page* is an option setting to limit the number of records per "
+"request that you retreive. Useful for sites which may have thousands of "
+"items per page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:41
+msgid ""
+"*Update a previous import* allows you to update - and overwrite - a "
+"previous import from the same source."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:42
+msgid ""
+"*Import Collections*: Check this box if you wish to import the "
+"collections from the Omeka 2 site to the Omeka S site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:44
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:46
+msgid "Map to Omeka S Properties"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:47
+msgid ""
+"This tab features a table for mapping between Omeka @ elements and Omeka "
+"S properties."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:49
+msgid ""
+"The Import module will automatically map many properties, but you may "
+"want to review the mapping in case you need to add or edit the automatic "
+"mapping. Custom item type elements may not map; you will need to "
+"manually map them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:52
+msgid "To clear the default mapping, click the *Clear Defaults* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:54
+msgid ""
+"The columns of the table are *Omeka 2 Element*, *Mapped Properties* and a"
+" checkbox option to *Import as HTML Media*. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:57
+msgid ""
+"The first set of the table is Dublin Core, followed by Item Type "
+"Metadata, but the import will also bring in any legacy or additional "
+"element sets (for example Omeka Legacy File)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:59
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:72
+msgid "To map:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:61
+msgid ""
+"Select the element or item type in the table by clicking on its row or "
+"label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:62
+msgid ""
+"In the right-hand drawer, either click through or search for the "
+"property to which you want to map your element."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:63
+msgid "Click on the property in the drawer to map it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:65
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:67
+msgid ""
+"To remove a mapping, click the delete (trash can) icon in the "
+"element/property row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:69
+msgid "Map to Omeka S Classes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:70
+msgid ""
+"In this tab you map Omeka Classic Item Types to Omeka S Resource Classes."
+" You can select from the classes for any of the installed vocabularies."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:74
+msgid "Select the item type in the table by clicking on its row or label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:75
+msgid ""
+"In the right-hand drawer, either click through or search for the "
+"resource class to which you want to map your element."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:76
+msgid "Click on the resource class in the drawer to map it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:78
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:80
+msgid "Complete Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:81
+msgid ""
+"When you have finished customizing the mapping, click the *Import* button"
+" in the upper right corner of the window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:83
+msgid ""
+"Are your jobs starting and not completing? You might need to [set the "
+"path for PHP](../configuration/) so that your system can perform the "
+"background process to make the items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:85
+msgid "Manage Past Imports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:87
+msgid ""
+"The past imports section of the module allows you to view previous API "
+"imports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:89
+msgid "Each import is a row. The table has the following columns."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:91
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:93
+msgid ""
+"*Undo*: Check this box if you wish to undo the import. Once you click "
+"submit, the status for that specific import will be undone."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:94
+msgid ""
+"*Job ID*: A numerical value assigned to each specific API import. You can"
+" also view the job under the Jobs tab on the administrative dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:95
+msgid ""
+"*Comment*: If you entered a comment in the Comment field in the Import "
+"section of the module, that comment will appear. If you typed \"Jane "
+"Doe's API, no key\" in the import section you will see it as a comment."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:96
+msgid "*Items*: Lists the number of items added and updated with each import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:97
+msgid "*Date*: The date on which the import took place."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:98
+msgid "*Status*: Will be in_progress, completed, or undone."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/omeka2importer.md:99
+msgid "*Owner*: The user who requested the import."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff022689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto.po
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto.rst:3
+msgid "Scripto"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/index.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/index.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..91f3adad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/index.po
@@ -0,0 +1,408 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:1
+msgid "Set up Scripto"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Scripto module for Omeka S allows you to create projects which allow "
+"members of the public to transcribe, translate, or describe media "
+"attached to items in your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:5
+msgid ""
+"The items and media are organized into an item set and then synced with a"
+" project in Scripto. Content made within Scripto can be periodically "
+"imported into Omeka S as item and media metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:7
+msgid ""
+"All content creation (transcription, translation, or description) takes "
+"place on the [public face](../../modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView/) of "
+"your Scripto [project](../../modules/scripto/scriptoproject/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:9
+msgid "Concepts and Terminology"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:11
+msgid ""
+"A Scripto **Project** allows you to organize the materials you want to "
+"work with, and set how you intend to work with them. A project can either"
+" transcribe, translate, or describe; it cannot do more than one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:13
+msgid ""
+"However, the Omeka S Scripto module allows you to create multiple "
+"projects on a single Scripto installation. Like sites in Omeka S, Scripto"
+" projects can exist independently of each other. This means that you can "
+"support a manuscript transcription project and a document translation "
+"project through the same Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:15
+msgid ""
+"An **Item** in Scripto corresponds to an item in Omeka S. When browsing "
+"projects, community members will page through items. Items can also be "
+"labeled as: audio, book, document, journal, manuscript, paper, or video."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:17
+msgid ""
+"The **Media** associated with an item are the level at which community "
+"members transcribe, translate, or describe. Every piece of media is "
+"associated with an item. Media can also be called: entry, folio, image, "
+"page, segment, section, or sheet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:19
+msgid "Installation and Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:20
+msgid "To install Scripto, you must:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:22
+msgid "be running Omeka S v2.0.0 or higher;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:23
+msgid ""
+"have a [MediaWiki](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/MediaWiki) installation"
+" running on the same server as the Omeka S installation. Minimum "
+"MediaWiki version is 1.30.0."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:25
+msgid ""
+"Create the MediaWiki installation on your server using [their "
+"instructions](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:FAQ#Installation_and_configuration)."
+" Install the Scripto module using the [documentation for installing "
+"modules](../index.md#installing-modules)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Once you have installed the module and created your MediaWiki "
+"installation, go to the Modules tab of your Omeka S installation and "
+"activate the Scripto module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:29
+msgid ""
+"Staying on the Modules tab, click the Configure button for the Scripto "
+"module. There is a single, required field for you to enter the url for "
+"your MediaWiki API."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:31
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Enter the url for your [MediaWiki API "
+"endpoint](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/API:Main_page#Endpoint) in the "
+"field; this should be along the lines of `/api.php`. "
+"Be sure to click \"Submit\" to save your changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:35
+msgid "Scripto Vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Once Scripto is installed and active, it will add the Scripto "
+"[Vocabulary](../../content/vocabularies/) to your Omeka S installation. "
+"This vocabulary contains the following properties:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:38
+msgid "Content: A plain text representation of the content of a resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:39
+msgid "Transcription: A transcription of a resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:40
+msgid "Translation: A translation of a resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:42
+msgid "Do not edit this vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:44
+msgid "Create an item set"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:45
+msgid ""
+"The Scripto module uses [item sets](../../content/item-sets) to manage "
+"the content coming to and from your Omeka installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:47
+msgid ""
+"Each Scripto project needs its own item set with which it can sync. "
+"Create the item set using items from your Omeka S installation which you "
+"want to be included in the project. You can add items to this item set "
+"later if you need to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:49
+msgid "Scripto Admin Dashboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:50
+msgid ""
+"The Scripto tab which appears under the Modules section of the left-hand "
+"navigation on the Omeka S installation admin side takes you to the "
+"Scripto Dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:52
+msgid ""
+"From the dashboard, you can log in to Scripto using the bar across the "
+"top:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:54
+msgid ""
+"![Scripto dashboard header and log in fields](../../modules/modulesfiles"
+"/scripto-dash-login.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:56
+msgid "Once you are logged in, the dashboard will include:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:58
+msgid ""
+"A bar across the top with your username and links to the dashboard, your "
+"contributions, your watchlist, and a button to Log Out of Scripto."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:59
+msgid ""
+"A view of all the [Projects](../../modules/scripto/scriptoproject/) you "
+"own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:60
+msgid ""
+"A view of all the [Projects](../../modules/scripto/scriptoproject/) you "
+"review"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:61
+msgid "A view of your recent Contributions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:62
+msgid "A view of your watchlist."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:64
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:66
+msgid ""
+"From the dropdown in the upper right, Omeka S global and site admins can:"
+" browse all [Projects](../../modules/scripto/scriptoproject/); add a new "
+"[Project](../../modules/scripto/scriptoproject/), and browse all Scripto "
+"users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:68
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:70
+msgid "Users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:71
+msgid ""
+"In addition to an Omeka S user account, any individual working on Scripto"
+" will need to have a MediaWiki user account as well. They can sign up for"
+" this account from the public side of the Scripto interface: `/scripto/create-account`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:73
+msgid ""
+"In order to change the status of transcriptions and sync projects to and "
+"from Omeka S, users must have [Bureaucrat level "
+"permissions](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:User_rights) on the "
+"MediaWiki installation. This *must be done on MediaWiki* and cannot be "
+"managed through the Scripto dashboard on Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:75
+msgid ""
+"You may find it easiest to have administrators of Scripto projects use "
+"the same or similar user names on both installations, in order to keep "
+"track of who is doing what."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:77
+msgid "Browse users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:78
+msgid ""
+"From the \"actions\" dropdown in the upper right corner of the Scripto "
+"Dashboard, you can select \"Browse users\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:80
+msgid ""
+"This will take you to a user browse page showing all of the Scripto users"
+" on this installation (from MediaWiki)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:82
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:84
+msgid "The users are displayed in a table listing their:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:86
+msgid "Name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:87
+msgid "MediaWiki Groups, which will indicate their roles"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:88
+msgid "Edit count (how many media they have edited)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:89
+msgid "Date the account was created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:91
+msgid "User contributions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:92
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on a user's name will take you to a page with a summary of their"
+" contributions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:94
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:96
+msgid ""
+"For each user, there will be a table with a row for every edit they have "
+"made to a piece of media. The columns are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:98
+msgid "Revision, with a timestamp which links to that revision;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:99
+msgid "Media #, with a link to the media;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:100
+msgid "Type;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:101
+msgid "Item, which links to the item *in Scripto*;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:102
+msgid "Project with which the item is associated;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:103
+msgid "Size of the edit;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:104
+msgid "Comment, if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:106
+msgid "Public and Admin views"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:107
+msgid ""
+"To toggle between the public and admin views of a project, delete the "
+"`/admin` from the url of any Scripto site, or add it in directly after "
+"the name of your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:109
+msgid ""
+"The admin side is `youromekaurl.net/admin/scripto` and the public side is"
+" `youromekaurl.net/scripto`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:111
+msgid ""
+"All transcription activity takes place on the **public** side of the "
+"Scripto project. You cannot edit a transcription from the admin "
+"dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:113
+msgid "Uninstalling Scripto"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/index.md:115
+msgid ""
+"In order to successfully uninstall Scripto, the module must be still be "
+"active. Do not deactivate Scripto prior to uninstalling."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1fb52779
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.po
@@ -0,0 +1,486 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:1
+msgid "Public Interface"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:3
+msgid ""
+"On the public side, all users can browse Scripto projects that are marked"
+" as public. In order to edit or create content, users may need a Scripto "
+"(Mediawiki) account and be logged in, but this is only required for "
+"MediaWiki installations that forbid anonymous editing. Even so, users may"
+" still want to log in to Scripto so they can better monitor their work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To toggle between the public and admin views of a project, delete the "
+"`/admin` from the url of any Scripto site, or add it in directly after "
+"the name of your Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:7
+msgid ""
+"The admin side is `youromekaurl.net/admin/scripto` and the public side is"
+" `youromekaurl.net/scripto`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:9
+msgid ""
+"All transcription activity takes place on the **public** side of the "
+"Scripto project. You cannot edit a transcription from the admin "
+"dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:11
+msgid ""
+"For an example of how to orient community members to the interface, see "
+"the [Guide to transcribing the *Papers of the War "
+"Department*](http://wardepartmentpapers.org/s/home/page/transcribing-"
+"guide)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:13
+msgid "Linking between Scripto and an Omeka S site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:14
+msgid ""
+"While the Scripto public interface exists somewhat separately from the "
+"sites you build in your Omeka S installation, it is possible to move "
+"between them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:16
+msgid ""
+"From your Omeka S sites, you can create direct links to your Scripto "
+"projects using the [custom link](../../sites/site_navigation.md#add-a"
+"-custom-link) in site Navigation or as a link in any [HTML page block "
+"text](../../sites/site_pages.md#html)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:18
+msgid "Scripto page block"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:19
+msgid ""
+"When you add the Scripto module, it creates a new [page "
+"block](../../sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks) called \"Scripto\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:21
+msgid ""
+"The Scripto page block offers a drop-down to let you select from all "
+"available Scripto [projects](scriptoproject). Select the project you want"
+" to link from the dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:23
+msgid ""
+"![Dropdown with a single site option](../modulesfiles/scripto-"
+"pageBlock.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:25
+msgid "On the public page view, this will display as a link."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Once you have applied this block to a site, it also creates a link from "
+"the project to that Omeka S site *when accessed via the site, rather than"
+" a direct Scripto link*. When users browse the project, the name of the "
+"associated site is listed in the upper right hand corner of the browser "
+"window, near their user information; this serves as a link to the site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:29
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:31
+msgid "Public-side user dashboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:32
+msgid ""
+"From the public side, users have access to their dashboard, which givens "
+"them an overview of your Contributions and your Watchlist."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Recent Contributions (documents the user has edited) display as a list. "
+"In each row, it will show the following information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:36
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:49
+msgid "Document type (just “document” in most cases);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:37
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:50
+msgid ""
+"Document title, which is also a link to the document page, with the page "
+"number in parentheses after the title;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:38
+msgid "Link to see the changes with the version immediately before that (“diff”);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:39
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:52
+msgid "Link to see the history of the document’s edits (“hist);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:40
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:53
+msgid ""
+"Date of last change in the format Month/Day/Year followed by timestamp; "
+"and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Summary of the changes, with the number of characters changed in "
+"parentheses, followed by any comment or summary supplied by the person "
+"making the change."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:43
+msgid ""
+"Above the list is a button which will take users to see all of their "
+"contributions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:45
+msgid ""
+"Watched pages will also display as a list. Watched pages include those "
+"which the user has already selected, which can include items being edited"
+" by another user. Next to the list header is a button which will display "
+"all items on the watchlist."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:47
+msgid "The list of watched pages displays the following information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:51
+msgid ""
+"Link to see the changes made with the version immediately before that "
+"(“diff”);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:54
+msgid ""
+"Summary of the changes, with the number of characters changed in "
+"parentheses, followed by any comment or summary supplied by the person "
+"making the change"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:56
+msgid "Public project browse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:57
+msgid ""
+"On the upper right of the browser, near the \"Log In\" buttons or, when "
+"logged in, the user icon, is a link to browse all projects in the Scripto"
+" instance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:59
+msgid ""
+"This browse page shows the project title, a representative icon "
+"determined by the first item in the project, and the project's "
+"description (set in the [configuration options](scriptoproject.md"
+"#configuration-options)), if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:61
+msgid ""
+" "
+"Clicking on any project's title or representative thumbnail takes you to "
+"the project's view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:64
+msgid "Public project view"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:65
+msgid ""
+"The main project view displays the title of the project, as well as its "
+"description, if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:67
+msgid ""
+"Across the top of the page, just under the Scripto navigation options "
+"(project browse and user icon), are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:69
+msgid "the Project title which functions as link back to the main project page;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:70
+msgid "a link to the project guidelines;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:71
+msgid "a browse items links; and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:72
+msgid ""
+"a search bar to search the items in the project (this is a full-text "
+"search for the metadata of the items and media)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:74
+msgid ""
+"Below this is a table of the items in the project. The table will be "
+"labeled Items unless you selected from the Item type dropdown in the "
+"project's [configuration options](scriptoproject.md#configuration-"
+"options)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:76
+msgid ""
+"The table has two display options. The default view is set in the "
+"project's configuration options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:78
+msgid "**List** displays the items in horizontal rows that prioritizes text with:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:79
+msgid "a small thumbnail of the image;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:80
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:86
+msgid "the document title;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:81
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:87
+msgid "date last transcribed;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:82
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:88
+msgid "transcription status; and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:83
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:89
+msgid "number of approved pages, shown as a bar and a numeric count."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:84
+msgid "**Grid** displays each items four per row with:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:85
+msgid ""
+"a large thumbnail of the first page, which can give you a quick sense of "
+"the quality of the image and handwriting;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:91
+msgid "Transcription stat"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:93
+msgid ""
+"On the public side, projects display a progress bar for all items, so "
+"that community users can easily identify media or items to work on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:96
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:98
+msgid "Public item view"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:99
+msgid ""
+"The public item view displays the Omeka S item metadata in a column on "
+"the left side, and the media in the main area on the right."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:101
+msgid ""
+"Users can toggle between gallery and list views using the layout button. "
+"They can also *sort* and *filter* media in the item. Sort options are by "
+"last edited, last completed, and last approved. Filter options are is "
+"edited, is not edited, is completed, is not completed, is approved, is "
+"not approved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:103
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:105
+msgid ""
+"Users can either click on the media's index number to view media "
+"information, on edit to go straight to the mediawiki "
+"transcription/translation interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:107
+msgid "Public media view"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:108
+msgid ""
+"The initial media view shows the media on the right, with metadata on the"
+" left. Underneath the media display is the HTML of whatever wikitext has "
+"already been generated."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:110
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the page is the title of the item, which functions as a "
+"link back to the item, followed by the media's number (the second page "
+"will be #2, for example). Below this information is the original title of"
+" the media itself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:112
+msgid "On the left above the media and metadata are a series of buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:114
+msgid "*Edit*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:115
+msgid "*Browse revision history*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:116
+msgid "*View notes*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:117
+msgid ""
+"And *track/stop tracking media* with a star button which toggles this "
+"option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:119
+msgid ""
+"On the right above the media and metadata is a pagination button which "
+"allows users to easily move between media for a single item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:121
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:123
+msgid "Adding text"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:124
+msgid ""
+"To start working with a piece of media, the user clicks \"edit\" in the "
+"toolbar above the media and metadata display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:126
+msgid ""
+"A new page loads, with a media viewer and an editing workspace for users "
+"to enter text. Depending on the selected layout, media may be to the "
+"right of the workspace or above it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:128
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:130
+msgid ""
+"The area between the media title and the workspace and viewer has a "
+"combination of information display and action items for the user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:132
+msgid ""
+"On the far left is a button to track or stop tracking media, with a star "
+"icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:133
+msgid ""
+"In the center is an information display with the media's Protection, "
+"protection expiration, and status, and a checkbox where the user can mark"
+" the media as completed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:134
+msgid "On the far right are buttons to *save* or *cancel* changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:135
+msgid ""
+"Users can rotate the media and zoom in and out using the controls within "
+"the media viewer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:136
+msgid ""
+"Users can use the layout buttons to toggle between side by side and top "
+"and bottom views."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:138
+msgid ""
+"Just above the MediaWiki workspace is a field where users are encouraged "
+"to summarize their changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md:140
+msgid ""
+"The editing workspace has a formatting toolbar which adds MediaWiki "
+"markup to the text (it does not change the appearance of the text in the "
+"workspace). Any formatting will be applied to the HTML view of the text "
+"after changes are saved."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d25e8aea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.po
@@ -0,0 +1,1089 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:1
+msgid "Scripto Projects"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Scripto is made up of projects. Every transcription, translation, or "
+"description effort you create can, and should, have its own project."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:5
+msgid "Create a Project"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:6
+msgid ""
+"This [screencast](https://vimeo.com/422818763) walks you through the "
+"process of creating a Scripto project in Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:8
+msgid ""
+"To create a new Scripto project, go to the Scripto dashboard (the Scripto"
+" tab in the left-hand navigation) and use the \"Actions\" dropdown menu "
+"in the upper right corner to select \"add new project\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:10
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:12
+msgid ""
+"This will load the New project page, which has two tabs: Configuration "
+"and Reviewers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:14
+msgid ""
+"The eye symbol on the upper right by the \"add\" button sets the "
+"visibility of the project. If the button is set to private (eye with a "
+"slash) it will only be visible to users *of the Omeka site*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:16
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:18
+msgid ""
+"You can change these settings at any time by editing the project using "
+"the Actions dropdown on the project review."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:20
+msgid "Configuration options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:21
+msgid ""
+"Some of these configuration options are required to create your Scripto "
+"project; all of them can be changed later using the \"Edit project\" "
+"option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:23
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:25
+msgid ""
+"**Title:** (required) the name of the Scripto project. This will display "
+"on public and admin sides."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:27
+msgid ""
+"**Item set:** (required) select the item set with which the Scripto "
+"project should synch. This item set should contain all the items and/or "
+"media you wish to include in the project."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:29
+msgid ""
+"**Property:** (required) select from the dropdown which property should "
+"store the content created through Scripto when it is imported back into "
+"Omeka S metadata. In addition to installed "
+"[Vocabularies](https://omeka.org/s/docs/user-"
+"manual/content/vocabularies/), Scripto has its own vocabulary options of "
+"content, transcription, and translation; any of these would work for the "
+"property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:31
+msgid ""
+"**Description:** a description of the project. This will display on "
+"public and admin sides."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:33
+msgid ""
+"**Guidelines:** transcription guidelines. These can be formatted using "
+"the text formatting editor which will appear when typing inside this "
+"field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:35
+msgid ""
+"![Guidelines editor in action, displaying editor](../modulesfiles"
+"/scripto-projectGuideEdit.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:37
+msgid ""
+"**Create account text:** enter text which will appear on the public page "
+"where users sign up to transcribe; for example, a brief summary of the "
+"aims or activities of the project. If left blank, the page will only "
+"display the fields for name, email, and password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:39
+msgid ""
+"**Language tag:** the language tag for the content being imported into "
+"the property selected above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:41
+msgid ""
+"**Import target:** select the resource level to store data when it is "
+"pushed from the Scripto project back to Omeka S metadata. Options are "
+"Item and Media, Item, or Media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:43
+msgid ""
+"If you select Item, then content created in Scripto will appear in the "
+"Item metadata, in the property you selected earlier."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:45
+msgid ""
+"If you select Media, the content created in Scripto will appear in the "
+"media metadata, but not at the item level."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:47
+msgid ""
+"**Browse layout:** choose the default browse layout for the project, "
+"either Grid or List."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:49
+msgid ""
+"**Filter approved:** when checked, approved items will not display in the"
+" public browse view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:51
+msgid ""
+"**Item Type:** if you want, you can specify the type of item used in this"
+" project. What you select here will change the interface language for "
+"users. For example, if you choose \"manuscript\" then the browse link for"
+" the project will display as \"browse manuscripts\" instead of \"browse "
+"items\". Choose from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:53
+msgid "Generic Item (default)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:54
+msgid "Audio"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:55
+msgid "Book"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:56
+msgid "Document"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:57
+msgid "Journal"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:58
+msgid "Manuscript"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:59
+msgid "Paper"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:60
+msgid "Video"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:62
+msgid ""
+"**Media Type:** use this dropdown to specify the type of media used in "
+"the project, and change the way that media is referred to in scripto for "
+"this project. Choose from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:64
+msgid "Generic Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:65
+msgid "Entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:66
+msgid "Folio"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:67
+msgid "Image"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:68
+msgid "Page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:69
+msgid "Section"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:70
+msgid "Segment"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:71
+msgid "Sheet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:73
+msgid ""
+"**Content Type:** use this to specify the kind of work in the project. "
+"Choose from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:75
+msgid "Generic Content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:76
+msgid "Description"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:77
+msgid "Transcription"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:78
+msgid "Translation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:80
+msgid "Reviewers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:81
+msgid ""
+"Add [Omeka S users](../../admin/users) to your Scripto project as "
+"reviewers, who can can access private projects, and mark media as "
+"approved and unapproved. You can manage users after adding a project (see"
+" below)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:83
+msgid ""
+"Only Omeka users with **site administrator** and g**lobal administrator**"
+" roles can sync and import projects, due to the destructive potential of "
+"those actions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:85
+msgid ""
+"Although reviewers do not need to have a MediaWiki account to review a "
+"Scripto project, it is recommended that they create one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:87
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:89
+msgid ""
+"On the right-hand side of the window is a browsable list of Omeka S "
+"users, sorted alphabetically by username. To add a user as a Scripto "
+"project reviewer, simply click on their name; this will add them to the "
+"table of reviewers in the main part of the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:91
+msgid "Be sure to add yourself as a reviewer if you plan to work on this project."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:93
+msgid ""
+"To remove a user as reviewer, click the trash can icon to the right of "
+"their email address in the table of reviewers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:95
+msgid "Add project"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:96
+msgid ""
+"Once you have entered the required fields and lick \"Add\" to create the "
+"new project."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:98
+msgid "Initial Sync"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:99
+msgid ""
+"Immediately upon creating a project, you will see the message: \"No "
+"Scripto items found. Do you need to sync the project? If you have "
+"recently synced, the sync job has likely not finished.\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:101
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:103
+msgid ""
+"To sync the project, go to the Actions dropdown button in the upper right"
+" corner of the window. From the options, select \"Sync project\" - this "
+"will update the project so that it has every item in the item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:105
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:107
+msgid ""
+"Note that the first time you run the sync may take some time, and you may"
+" continue to see the \"No Scripto items found\" message. You should also "
+"see a green message across the top of the page stating that the project "
+"is syncing and giving you a link to the job for the sync."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:109
+msgid "Admin Project View"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:110
+msgid ""
+"From the Scripto dashboard you can access projects you own and those to "
+"which you have reviewer access. Regardless of your status for the "
+"project, clicking on the project's title will take you to its review "
+"page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:112
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:114
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the page you will see the title of the project along with "
+"the label \"Review\". Underneath the project title will be the Scripto "
+"account bar, where you can either log in or navigate to the dashboard, "
+"your contributions and watchlist."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:116
+msgid ""
+"In the top right corner is the Actions dropdown which has the following "
+"options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:118
+msgid "[Edit project](#edit-project)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:119
+msgid "[Sync project](#sync-project)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:120
+msgid "[Import content](#import-content)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:121
+msgid "[Unimport content](#unimport-content)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:123
+msgid ""
+"The sidebar on the right summarizes the metadata for the project. The "
+"project title, item set, and owner all act as links."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:125
+msgid "Table of items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:126
+msgid ""
+"In the main work area is a table with all of the items in the project, "
+"with the following information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:128
+msgid "Item* (first media thumbnail and title)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:129
+msgid "Ellipses to see item metadata - this will open in a drawer on the right"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:130
+msgid "Date synced: date most recently synced."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:131
+msgid "Last edited. If the item's media has not been edited, this will be blank"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:132
+msgid "Media* count: number of media associated with the item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:133
+msgid "Status: item status, which will be blank, completed, or approved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:135
+msgid ""
+"*NB: If you changed the Item, Media, or Content in the project "
+"configuration, then you will see the terms you selected instead of "
+"\"item\" or \"media\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:137
+msgid "Above the table are options to:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:139
+msgid "search items and media in the project (search bar)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:140
+msgid "page through the project's items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:141
+msgid "sort items and media, either ascending or descending, by:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:142
+msgid "Date synced"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:143
+msgid "Last edited"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:144
+msgid "filter results by:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:145
+msgid "is approved"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:146
+msgid "is not approved"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:147
+msgid "is in progress"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:148
+msgid "is new"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:149
+msgid "is edited after imported"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:151
+msgid ""
+"To find items which have been edited and are ready for review, filter all"
+" items by \"is in progress.\" You may also want to sort by last edited."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:153
+msgid "Edit project"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:154
+msgid ""
+"You can edit your project using the Actions dropdown in the upper right "
+"hand corner of the screen. It offers the same two tabs you used when "
+"[creating your project](#create-a-project) - [Configuration"
+"](#configuration-options) and [Reviewers](#reviewers)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:156
+msgid "Admin Item Review"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:157
+msgid ""
+"[This screencast](https://vimeo.com/431828023) shows the process of "
+"reviewing an item and its media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:159
+msgid "To review an item, click on its title in the project view."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:161
+msgid ""
+"The Item view page, like the project view, has near the top of the page a"
+" Scripto account bar, where you can either log in or navigate to the "
+"dashboard, your contributions and watchlist."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:163
+msgid ""
+"On the right is a drawer summarizing the item's status and data. The "
+"properties for the Scripto Project and Omeka S item link back to their "
+"respective properties. Click the bar between the drawer and the main work"
+" area (indicated with a `>` symbol) to collapse the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:165
+msgid ""
+"![item admin side with drawer open](../../modules/modulesfiles/scripto-"
+"itemview.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:167
+msgid ""
+"The main work area has two tabs: one summarizing Media information and "
+"one with the Omeka item metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:169
+msgid "Media tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:170
+msgid ""
+"On the Media tab, there is a table with all the media in an item. Users "
+"transcribe media by media, so Scripto allows you to review on the media "
+"level."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:172
+msgid "The table includes:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:174
+msgid "A **checkbox** for the media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:175
+msgid "The **index number** of the media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:176
+msgid ""
+"The media's **thumbnail** and **title**. Click on this to review the "
+"media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:177
+msgid ""
+"An ellpises (`...`) which opens a drawer on the right displaying the "
+"metadata for that media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:178
+msgid "**last edited** date"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:179
+msgid "**status**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:180
+msgid "**Edit protection** (admin only, open to all)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:182
+msgid ""
+"You can sort the table by last synced, last edited, last completed and "
+"last approved, either ascending or descending, using the drop-downs in "
+"the upper right of the tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:184
+msgid ""
+"You can also filter which media are displayed using the dropdown to show "
+"only:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:186
+msgid "Is/is not edited"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:187
+msgid "Is/is not completed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:188
+msgid "Is/is not approved"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:189
+msgid "Is edited after approved"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:190
+msgid "Is edited after imported"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:191
+msgid "Is synced after imported"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:193
+msgid "Using the checkbox you can edit selected or all media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:195
+msgid ""
+"To review a specific piece of media, click either on its title or "
+"thumbnail. This will take you to its [media review page](#media-review-"
+"page)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:197
+msgid "Batch edit media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:198
+msgid ""
+"If you batch edit media from the Review item tab, you have the following "
+"options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:200
+msgid "Set completion status as Complete, incomplete, or no change."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:201
+msgid "Set Approval status as Approved, not approved, or no change."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:202
+msgid ""
+"Change protection level for the selected media to one of the following: "
+"No change, Allow all users, Allow only confirmed users, or Allow only "
+"administrators."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:203
+msgid ""
+"Set an expiry date for the protection, choosing from: infinite, 1 hour, 1"
+" day, 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months, 1 year."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:204
+msgid "Set watchlist status as watch, unwatch, or no change."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:206
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:208
+msgid ""
+"On the right side of the batch edit media view is a list of all of the "
+"media which you are editing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:210
+msgid ""
+"When you are done, either click Save or Cancel, in the upper right hand "
+"corner of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:212
+msgid "Omeka item metadata"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:213
+msgid ""
+"This tab is a static display of the metadata for the Omeka S item with "
+"which the Scripto item is associated. When you sync the project, this is "
+"the item which will be updated. To edit the item, scroll in the right "
+"hand drawer display of Scripto item metadata to find the Omeka item link "
+"(indicated with an arrow in the below image)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:215
+msgid ""
+"![Omeka item metadata view](../../modules/modulesfiles/scripto-"
+"omekaitemmeta.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:217
+msgid "Media Review page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:218
+msgid ""
+"Review of user-generated content takes place at the media level. To "
+"review the work for a specific piece of media, click on its title or "
+"thumbnail from the review item page of the item with which it is "
+"associated."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:220
+msgid ""
+"The Review media page consists of three tabs in the main work area and a "
+"drawer on the right hand side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:222
+msgid "Along the top of the page are the following buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:224
+msgid ""
+"A **star** to add this page to your watchlist (if you are logged in to "
+"Scripto)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:225
+msgid "A button to go to the **Revision History**"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:226
+msgid "A button to **View notes** of the media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:227
+msgid "A button to **Save** changes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:229
+msgid ""
+"The first tab is **Wikitext** and displays the user-generated text from "
+"MediaWiki next to the media. You can use the Layout buttons to toggle "
+"between side by side and top and bottom display. You can zoom in and "
+"rotate the media display using the buttons within the media viewer. There"
+" is also an option to go to a full screen view of the text and media. "
+"Note that you cannot edit the text from this view, you can only read it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:231
+msgid ""
+"The second tab is an **HTML** display of the Wikitext content, showing "
+"the formatted text as it will display on the public side of a site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:233
+msgid "The third tab is **Omeka media metadata** for the media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:235
+msgid ""
+"To the right of the tabs is a set of foward-backward arrow buttons and "
+"numbers (1 of 2 in the image) which allow you to move through media "
+"attached to an item without backing out to the Review item page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:237
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:239
+msgid ""
+"The drawer on the right is where review actions take place, in the "
+"section titled \"Review Status.\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:241
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the drawer is the **This revision** section where you can "
+"move through revisions using the forward and back arrows. The first line "
+"in this section indicates whether it is the \"Latest\" revision or \"out "
+"of date\". Use the double-forward (`>>`) button to skip to the latest "
+"revision. This section also displays the name of the user who created "
+"this revision, the timestamp, and any comments they may have made when "
+"saving their changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:243
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:245
+msgid "The next section is **Review status**."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:247
+msgid "You can move through revisions using the forward and backward arrows."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:248
+msgid ""
+"You can view review status and modify using checkboxes if your Mediawiki "
+"role includes bureaucrat."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:249
+msgid ""
+"You can edit the protection of the Wikitext page, choosing from all "
+"users, confirmed users, or only administrators, and set the protection to"
+" expire or set it as indefinite. Again, you can only do this if your "
+"Mediawiki role allows it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:251
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:278
+msgid ""
+"You can toggle the drawer open and closed using the open arrow `>` button"
+" in the middle of the divider between the drawer and the main work area."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:254
+msgid "Media status:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:256
+msgid ""
+"**Complete:** Community users have the ability to mark a media they are "
+"working on as \"complete.\" This serves as a flag to notify the project "
+"team that the media is ready for review. If a media is not completely "
+"transcribed/translated/described, adminstrators can reverse the Complete "
+"status."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:257
+msgid ""
+"**Approved:** Approval is granted by administrators and indicates that "
+"every media is complete and satisfactory. Items can only be considered "
+"approved when all child media are approved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:258
+msgid ""
+"**Protected:** Protection is a [MediaWiki "
+"function](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:Administrators#Protection)."
+" In the context of Scripto, it is a way for project owners to close "
+"editing on a media or item at a certain point, either because it is "
+"complete or because of a need to deal with that particular media or item "
+"(bad scan, for example)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:259
+msgid ""
+"Protection can be limited to users, confirmed users, or administrators. "
+"In addition, you can choose to protect the media infinitely or for a set"
+" amount of time: 1 hour; 1 day; 1 week; 2 weeks; 1 month; 3 months; 6 "
+"months; or 1 year."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:261
+msgid "Revision History"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:262
+msgid ""
+"Clicking the \"Revision History at the top of the Review media page takes"
+" you to a listing of the revision history for the media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:264
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the timestamp for a revision will take you to that revision."
+" "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:267
+msgid "Notes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:268
+msgid ""
+"Notes are a way for project staff and transcribers to communicate. Access"
+" the notes for a specific media using the \"View notes\" button in the "
+"upper right corner of the Review Media page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:270
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:272
+msgid ""
+"The note review options are similar to the media review options: there is"
+" a tab for wiktext where you can see the notes to the left of a small "
+"view of the media. The HTML tab displays only the wikitext in full HTML "
+"markup, not editable. The Omeka media metadata tab allows you to review "
+"the Omeka S metadata associated with the media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:274
+msgid ""
+"Using the drawer on the right hand side of the screen, you can change the"
+" protection of the notes page to allow only the selected level of users "
+"to edit the notes page: all users, only confirmed users, or only "
+"administrators."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:276
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:280
+msgid "Sharing data between Scripto and Omeka S"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:281
+msgid ""
+"Scripto projects and the Omeka S items and item sets with which they are "
+"associated are separate entities. In order to update either Scripto or "
+"Omeka S, you will need to take one of the following actions on your "
+"project from the Actions dropdown in the upper right corner of the screen"
+" on the Project review page:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:283
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:291
+msgid "Sync project"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:284
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:298
+msgid "Import content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:285
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:307
+msgid "Unimport content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:287
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:289
+msgid ""
+"All three of these actions open a drawer on the right side of the screen "
+"with a summary of what the action does. In order to complete the action, "
+"you must click the button at the end of the text in order to complete the"
+" action."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:292
+msgid ""
+"Syncing a project updates the project in Scripto with information "
+"**from** the Omeka S item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:294
+msgid ""
+"Use this option if you have made changes to the Omeka S item set, or the "
+"items in that set. You should synchronize periodically, any time items "
+"are added or removed from the item set, and when item media have been "
+"added, removed, or reordered."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:296
+msgid ""
+"![Sync content drawer with a message summarizing what it does. At the "
+"bottom is a button which says \"Sync project\"](../modulesfiles/scripto-"
+"syncproject.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:299
+msgid ""
+"This option is how you move content from your Scripto project **to** "
+"Omeka S metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:301
+msgid ""
+"This will only move approved transcriptions (or similar content) to the "
+"Omeka S items. By default, the target are Scripto vocabulary properties "
+"in the resource type you selected during configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:303
+msgid ""
+"If you have a project which is fairly active, you should plan to import "
+"content weekly or monthly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:305
+msgid ""
+"![Import content drawer with a message summarizing what it does. At the "
+"bottom is a button which says \"Import project\"](../modulesfiles"
+"/scripto-importproject.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:308
+msgid "This option deletes all project content from Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:310
+msgid ""
+"![Unimport content drawer with a message summarizing what it does. At the"
+" bottom is a button which says \"Unimport project\"](../modulesfiles"
+"/scripto-unimportproject.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:312
+msgid "Delete a project"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:313
+msgid ""
+"To delete a project, choose the 'Edit project' option from the Actions "
+"dropdown in the upper right corner of the project dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:315
+msgid ""
+"Click the Delete button in the upper right hand corner of the editing "
+"window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:317
+msgid ""
+"![arrow pointing to the delete button](../modulesfiles/scripto-"
+"deleteProject.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md:319
+msgid ""
+"This will open a drawer asking you to confirm that you wish to delete the"
+" project. Click Confirm Delete to completely delete the project."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9c8de16a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.po
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:1
+msgid "Themeing Scripto"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Scripto themes are a way to unite the look of a Scripto project with its "
+"associated Omeka S site. You first associate a Scripto project to a site "
+"by linking to the project from the site's navigation. In the Omeka S site"
+" dashboard, go to the \"Navigation\" settings, and add \"Scripto\" to "
+"your site's navigation. When a user comes to your site, that navigation "
+"link will provide Scripto with your site context and apply the "
+"accompanying Scripto theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:5
+msgid "Using an Existing Scripto Theme"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:7
+msgid ""
+"The only requirement for a Scripto theme is a stylesheet (.css) file "
+"within the Scripto module in the following subdirectory: "
+"`Scripto\\asset\\css\\site-themes\\`. The stylesheet name must match the "
+"name of your site theme directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:9
+msgid ""
+"The Omeka S theme \"Papers\", based off the Papers of the War Department "
+"project theme, contains its companion Scripto theme in the following "
+"path: `asset/css/scripto/papers.css`. There are two ways to enable this "
+"theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:11
+msgid "Manually copy the CSS file to the Scripto module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Copy your CSS file into the appropriate directory within the Scripto "
+"module. The path from within your Omeka S installation looks like this: "
+"`[$ROOT]/modules/Scripto/asset/css/site-themes`. If you want to make any "
+"changes to your Scripto theme, your styles will be read from that "
+"location."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:15
+msgid "Use the command line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:17
+msgid ""
+"This method is for more technical users. The \"Papers\" theme uses Gulp "
+"to manage Sass/CSS compiling, and has a specific task for exporting the "
+"Scripto theme. To use this task, navigate to the root of the theme folder"
+" via the command line and type `gulp scripto`. This will compile the "
+"Scripto theme and place it in the correct folder, provided the Scripto "
+"module has been installed. Note: Scripto themes are not required to use "
+"Gulp or Sass, so this method may not always be an option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:19
+msgid "Writing a Scripto Theme"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:21
+msgid ""
+"The only requirement for a Scripto theme is a stylesheet (.css) file "
+"within the Scripto module in the following subdirectory: "
+"`Scripto/asset/css/site-themes/`. The stylesheet name must match the name"
+" of your site theme directory. Note: all Scripto customizations must be "
+"controlled via CSS—themers cannot make changes to the Scripto markup."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:23
+msgid ""
+"The `@import` CSS rule can help create a quick foundation for your "
+"Scripto theme by importing existing styles. For example once again using "
+"the \"Papers\" theme, your `@import` rules would look like this:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:30
+msgid ""
+"This import uses relative paths from your custom Scripto theme to the "
+"default Scripto theme and the site theme. You can now write your style "
+"overrides and Scripto-specific CSS."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:32
+msgid "Using Sass with Scripto Themes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:34
+msgid ""
+"Like Omeka S itself and many of its themes, the \"Papers\" theme manages "
+"its styles with Gulp and Sass. If you plan on using these tools, here are"
+" commands you'll need to run from the root of the \"Papers\" theme:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:36
+msgid ""
+"`npm install`: Install the theme's Node dependencies. This is required "
+"before running any tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:37
+msgid ""
+"`gulp css`: This command will look at your `.scss` files within "
+"`asset/sass` and export their respective CSS files into `asset/css`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:38
+msgid ""
+"`gulp css:watch`: This command performs the same function as `gulp css`, "
+"but watches the `asset/sass` folder for any ongoing changes until the "
+"command is stopped."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:39
+msgid ""
+"`gulp scripto`: This command performs the same function as `gulp css`, "
+"but includes Scripto theme files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:40
+msgid ""
+"`gulp scripto:watch`: This command performs the same function as `gulp "
+"css:watch`, but includes Scripto theme files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:42
+msgid "Theme Assets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md:44
+msgid ""
+"An important note: because Scripto is totally controlled with CSS, it "
+"cannot interact with theme options in a site theme, like user-set image "
+"assets or colors. If you plan on using custom backgrounds or logos for a "
+"site theme alongside a Scripto theme, save the images to a folder within "
+"your site theme and reference them using relative paths accordingly."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2b2c6d9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.po
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:1
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:12
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The following are advanced options and troubleshooting tips for Scripto "
+"for Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:5
+msgid "Disable anonymous editing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:6
+msgid ""
+"By default, Scripto for Omeka S allows anonymous users to edit the "
+"content on your projects."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:8
+msgid ""
+"To prevent this, you will need to edit the files in the directory "
+"containing your MediaWiki installation. Add the line "
+"`$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;` to LocalSettings.php"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:10
+msgid ""
+"For more information, see the [MediaWiki manual on preventing "
+"access](https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:Preventing_access)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:13
+msgid "Project sync stuck"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md:14
+msgid ""
+"If your project sync will not start or remains in process, check that you"
+" have [correctly configured the PHP-CLI path for your Omeka S "
+"installation](https://omeka.org/s/docs/developer/configuration/config_reference/#cli)."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/sharing.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/sharing.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8764b409
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/sharing.po
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:1
+msgid "Sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Sharing [module](../modules/index.md) allows you to add buttons to "
+"site pages which visitors can use to share and embed content from your "
+"site on social media or via email."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:5
+msgid "Currently, Sharing supports the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:6
+msgid "Facebook"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:7
+msgid "Twitter"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:8
+msgid "Tumblr"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:9
+msgid "Pinterest"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:10
+msgid "Email"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:11
+msgid "Embed codes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Once sharing has been [installed](../modules/index.md#installing-modules)"
+" and activated for an Omeka S install, it is available for all sites on "
+"the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:15
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:17
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:19
+msgid "Sharing settings are configured on a site by site basis."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:21
+msgid ""
+"Go to the site for which you want to configure the plugin and click "
+"through to the edit site dashboard. Click on the Site Settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:23
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:25
+msgid ""
+"There should be a section labelled \"Sharing\" (see the image below) "
+"with two options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:27
+msgid ""
+"*Enable Sharing module for these methods*: gives a series of checkboxes, "
+"one for each service or option (Facebook, twitter, etc)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:29
+msgid ""
+"*Sharing buttons placement on the page*: sets the placement of the "
+"sharing buttons either at the top of the content (below the navigation "
+"and page header) or at the bottom (just above the footer)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:31
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Ensure that the correct boxes are checked for your site. You can uncheck "
+"all of the boxes to turn off sharing for your site. Be sure to save your "
+"changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:35
+msgid "Public Side"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:37
+msgid ""
+"Sharing icons for enabled services and options will display at the bottom"
+" of pages you build as well as individual item/show pages on your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:39
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:41
+msgid ""
+"By default, the module will share the page title, name of site, and name "
+"of installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/sharing.md:43
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/valuesuggest.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/valuesuggest.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4f2837f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/valuesuggest.po
@@ -0,0 +1,653 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:1
+msgid "ValueSuggest"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The ValueSuggest module adds an auto-complete feature to a specific "
+"property in a resource template and draws on controlled vocabularies (see"
+" the end of this page for a complete list)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:5
+msgid ""
+"This functionality helps those building an Omeka site to encourage "
+"consistent metadata input and data compatibility with other databases of "
+"records. Please note that ValueSuggest offers but cannot require that "
+"users select values from the autosuggest feature. Users will always have "
+"the option of creating their own value instead."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:7
+msgid ""
+"To install ValueSuggest follow the instructions for Installing Modules on"
+" the Modules documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:9
+msgid "Create a Resource Template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:11
+msgid ""
+"ValueSuggest vocabularies are applied through Resource Templates. For "
+"additional information on Resource Templates, see the [Resource Template "
+"Documentation](../content/resource-template.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:13
+msgid ""
+"From the Resources templates tab in the Admin Dashboard, either add a new"
+" [template](../content/resource-template.md) or edit an existing one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:14
+msgid "Add the property to which you want to apply the ValueSuggest."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:15
+msgid ""
+"Once the property is added to the template, click the pencil/edit icon "
+"for that property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:16
+msgid ""
+"At the bottom of the drawer which opens on the right, open the *Data "
+"type* dropdown. Below the standard options, you will see the ValueSuggest"
+" options. Select the vocabulary you want to use from the dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:17
+msgid ""
+"Note that you can also add alternate labels and comments for the property"
+" in this drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:18
+msgid ""
+"Click the *Set changes* button at the bottom of the drawer to assign the "
+"Values to the property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:19
+msgid "Save changes to the resource template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:22
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:24
+msgid ""
+"When you click the title of a Resource Template to see its details, the "
+"ValueSuggest vocabulary will appear under the Data Type table heading."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:26
+msgid ""
+"![A red rectangle highlights the fact that the data type for Subject is "
+"\"LC: Subject Headings\"](../modules/modulesfiles/ValSug-"
+"ResTemplate2.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:29
+msgid "Adding ValueSuggest to an Item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:31
+msgid ""
+"When this Resource Template is used in an Item or Item Set, the "
+"designated properties will auto-suggest values from the vocabulary "
+"specified in the template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Users must start typing in the open text box of that specific property to"
+" prompt the auto-suggest feature. There may be a slight delay, but a "
+"drop-down menu will appear with choices drawn directly from the authority"
+" or vocabulary list you have associated with that property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:35
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:37
+msgid ""
+"Hover over selections in the dropdown menu for a description of that "
+"vocabulary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:39
+msgid ""
+"![Item property Material with \"lithograph\" typed in the field. A "
+"dropdown menu auto-suggests terms, including \"color lithographs,\" which"
+" is selected. Helper text in a small overlaid window reads, \"Lithographs"
+" printed in several colors.\"](../modules/modulesfiles/ValSug-"
+"ItemProperty2.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:41
+msgid ""
+"Note: after selecting a value, a box containing a URL should appear under"
+" the value. This link will direct visitors to a webpage with additional "
+"information on the value selected. This box can be removed by clicking "
+"the “X”."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:43
+msgid ""
+"![Item property Work Type with \"Fashion Illustrations (layout "
+"features)\" selected. Below, in red is a hyperlink to Getty Collections, "
+"with a small red \"X\".](../modules/modulesfiles/ValSug-"
+"ItemProperty3.png)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:45
+msgid "Available Vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:47
+msgid "This module includes the following vocabularies:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:49
+msgid "GeoNames"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:50
+msgid "The Getty Vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:51
+msgid "Homosaurus"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:52
+msgid "Library of Congress Linked Data Service"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:53
+msgid "OCLC Metadata Services"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:54
+msgid "PACTOLS of Frantiq"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:55
+msgid "PeriodO"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:56
+msgid "RDA Value Vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:57
+msgid "Tesauros del patrimonio cultural de España"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:58
+msgid "UNESCO"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:61
+msgid "[GeoNames](http://www.geonames.org/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:63
+msgid "The GeoNames geographical database"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:65
+msgid "[The Getty Vocabularies](http://vocab.getty.edu/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:67
+msgid "The Art & Architecture Thesaurus (AAT)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:68
+msgid "The Getty Thesaurus of Geographic Names (TGN)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:69
+msgid "The Union List of Artist Names (ULAN)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:71
+msgid "[Homosaurus](http://homosaurus.org/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:73
+msgid "Homosaurus.org linked data vocabulary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:75
+msgid "[Library of Congress Linked Data Service](http://id.loc.gov/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:77
+msgid "AFS Ethnographic Thesaurus"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:78
+msgid "All"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:79
+msgid "Children's Subject Heading"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:80
+msgid "Classification"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:81
+msgid "Cultural Heritage Organizations"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:82
+msgid "Demographic Group Terms"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:83
+msgid "Genre/Form Terms"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:84
+msgid "ISO639-1 Languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:85
+msgid "ISO639-2 Languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:86
+msgid "ISO639-5 Languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:87
+msgid "MARC Countries"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:88
+msgid "MARC Geographic Areas"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:89
+msgid "MARC Languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:90
+msgid "MARC Relators"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:91
+msgid "Medium of Performance Thesaurus for Music"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:92
+msgid "Name Authority File"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:93
+msgid "Subject Headings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:94
+msgid "Thesaurus for Graphic Materials"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:96
+msgid ""
+"[OCLC Metadata "
+"Services](https://www.oclc.org/en/services/a-z.html/:F2664:/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:98
+msgid "Faceted Application of Subject Terminologies (FAST)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:99
+msgid "The Virtual International Authority File (VIAF)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:101
+msgid "[PACTOLS of Frantiq](https://pactols.frantiq.fr/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:103
+msgid "The entire pactols thesaurus"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:104
+msgid "The subject group only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:106
+msgid "[PeriodO](http://perio.do/en/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:108
+msgid "A gazetteer of period definitions for linking and visualizing data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:110
+msgid "[RDA Value Vocabularies](http://www.rdaregistry.info/termList/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:112
+msgid "RDA Reference value vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:114
+msgid "Aspect Ratio Designation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:115
+msgid "Bibliographic Format"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:116
+msgid "Broadcast Standard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:117
+msgid "Carrier Extent Unit"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:118
+msgid "Carrier Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:119
+msgid "Cartographic Data Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:120
+msgid "Colour Content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:121
+msgid "Configuration of Playback Channels"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:122
+msgid "Content Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:123
+msgid "Conventional Collective Title"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:124
+msgid "File Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:125
+msgid "Font Size"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:126
+msgid "Form of Musical Notation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:127
+msgid "Form of Notated Movement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:128
+msgid "Form of Tactile Notation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:129
+msgid "Format of Notated Music"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:130
+msgid "Frequency"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:131
+msgid "Generation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:132
+msgid "Groove Pitch of an Analog Cylinder"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:133
+msgid "Groove Width of an Analog Disc"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:134
+msgid "Illustrative Content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:135
+msgid "Layout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:136
+msgid "Material"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:137
+msgid "Media Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:138
+msgid "Mode of Issuance"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:139
+msgid "Polarity"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:140
+msgid "Presentation Format"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:141
+msgid "Production Method"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:142
+msgid "Recording Medium"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:143
+msgid "Reduction Ratio Designation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:144
+msgid "Regional Encoding"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:145
+msgid "Scale Designation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:146
+msgid "Sound Content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:147
+msgid "Special Playback Characteristics"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:148
+msgid "Status of Identification"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:149
+msgid "Terms"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:150
+msgid "Track Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:151
+msgid "Type of Recording"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:152
+msgid "Video Format"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:154
+msgid "RDA Local value vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:156
+msgid "Gender"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:158
+msgid "RDA/ONIX Framework value vocabularies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:160
+msgid "Character"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:161
+msgid "Extension Mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:162
+msgid "Extension Requirement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:163
+msgid "Extension Termination"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:164
+msgid "Housing Format"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:165
+msgid "Image Dimensionality"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:166
+msgid "Image Movement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:167
+msgid "Interaction"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:168
+msgid "Intermediation Tool"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:169
+msgid "Revision Mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:170
+msgid "Revision Requirement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:171
+msgid "Revision Termination"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:172
+msgid "Sensory Mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:173
+msgid "Storage Medium Format"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:175
+msgid ""
+"[Tesauros del patrimonio cultural de "
+"España](http://tesauros.mecd.es/tesauros)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:177
+msgid "Diccionario de Bienes Culturales"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:178
+msgid "Diccionario de Materias"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:179
+msgid "Diccionario de Técnicas"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:180
+msgid "Diccionario de Contextos Culturales"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:181
+msgid "Diccionario Geográfico"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:182
+msgid "Diccionario de Toponimia Histórica"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:183
+msgid "Diccionario de Cerámica"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:184
+msgid "Diccionario de Numismática"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:185
+msgid "Diccionario de Mobiliario"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:187
+msgid "[UNESCO](http://skos.um.es/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:189
+msgid "Tesauro"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:190
+msgid "Nomenclatura de Ciencia y Tecnología"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/valuesuggest.md:191
+msgid "Biblioteca Digital Floridablanca"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/zoteroimport.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/zoteroimport.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d0fcac58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/modules/zoteroimport.po
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:1
+msgid "Zotero Import"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Zotero Import is a [module](index.md) for Omeka S which allows you to "
+"connect an Omeka S instance to a Zotero library and import items from "
+"that library."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:5
+msgid ""
+"To install Zotero Import, follow the instructions for [Installing "
+"Modules](index.md#installing-modules)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:7
+msgid "Prepare your Zotero Library"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:8
+msgid ""
+"In order to import from a Zotero library, you must have API access to the"
+" library. To use Zotero Import, you will need the ID for the group or "
+"user"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:10
+msgid ""
+"Individual IDs are found on the Feeds/API tab of your Zotero Settings; "
+"there is a sentence stating “Your userID for use in API call is”."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:11
+msgid ""
+"Group IDs are found on the Zotero group library page by looking at the "
+"URL of the library - it will be `zotero.org/groups/`. If you go "
+"to https://api.zotero.org/groups/`, you should get some "
+"information on that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:13
+msgid ""
+"You may also want to have the id for a specific collection and an API key"
+" to import files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:15
+msgid ""
+"Collection keys appear in the url of a collection page - they are the "
+"alphanumeric sequence at the end of the url, following “collections/“"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:16
+msgid ""
+"To generate an API key, go to Settings in your Zotero account, to the "
+"Feeds/API tab, and click the *Create new private key* link."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:18
+msgid "Import Data"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:20
+msgid ""
+"To import, go to the Zotero Import tab on the left-hand navigation of the"
+" admin dashboard of your Omeka S install. This will automatically take "
+"you to the Import sub-tab, also in the left-hand navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:22
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:24
+msgid "To import from a Zotero library:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:26
+msgid "Choose an Item Set to which the imported items will be added (required);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Choose between *User* or *Group* libraries with the radio buttons "
+"(required);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:28
+msgid ""
+"Enter the Library ID (this is either the Group or User ID number, "
+"discussed above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:29
+msgid "If importing a collection enter the collection key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:30
+msgid ""
+"Enter your API key to import private data and/or files (optional for "
+"import but necessary to import files)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:31
+msgid ""
+"Click the checkbox to import files. The API key is required to import "
+"files. \t* HTML page snapshots will be imported as zip files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:33
+msgid ""
+"The “Added After”option allows you to import only those Zotero items "
+"added to the library after the date and time you choose. You can use this"
+" as a way to update from a previous import without re-adding files you "
+"already imported."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:35
+msgid ""
+"When you have completed the form, click Submit in the upper right-hand "
+"corner of the browser window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:37
+msgid ""
+"Are your jobs starting and not completing? You might need to [set the "
+"path for PHP](../configuration/) so that your system can perform the "
+"background process to make the items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:39
+msgid ""
+"A note on files: The rules for importing an item are the same as creating"
+" an item in Omeka, so if your Zotero library has files which are a "
+"disallowed media type, the items will not be imported."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:41
+msgid ""
+"The page will load on the Past Imports tab with a message \"Importing "
+"from Zotero\". To check the status of the import, reload the page or "
+"click to the [Jobs](../admin/jobs.md) tab of the left-hand navigation on "
+"the admin dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:43
+msgid "Managing Past Imports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:45
+msgid ""
+"To view and manage past imports, click on the Zotero Import tab in the "
+"left-hand navigation, and then click on the \"Past Imports\" sub-tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:47
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:49
+msgid ""
+"The Past Imports shows a table of previous imports, whether successful, "
+"failed on error, or undone. The table has the following columns:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:51
+msgid "*Zotero Library* giving the User or Group library name;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:52
+msgid "The *Undo* button, which is a counter-clockwise curved arrow;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:53
+msgid "*Items Added Before* the date of the import;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:54
+msgid ""
+"*Job Status* current status of job. Clicking on the text of a job status "
+"will take you to that job's page;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:55
+msgid "*Item count* the number of items added in the import."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:57
+msgid ""
+"To Undo an import, click the *Undo* button to the left of the *Items "
+"Added Before* timestamp. This will open a sidebar dialog asking you to "
+"confirm that you want to undo the import and delete all imported items. "
+"Click *Confirm* to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:59
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/modules/zoteroimport.md:61
+msgid ""
+"Past Imports which have already been undone will have a job status \"Undo"
+" Import Completed\"."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/s-planning-tips.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/s-planning-tips.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..820e9039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/s-planning-tips.po
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:1
+msgid "Planning Tips"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:3
+msgid ""
+"In Omeka S, you build your [sites](sites/index) page by page, using "
+"already existing resources on your installation. While it is best to have"
+" some resources before you start building out the pages, you can begin "
+"planning your site before you create the first item or item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:5
+msgid ""
+"What follows are some questions and ideas to help guide you as you plan "
+"your sites in Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:7
+msgid "Site audience and goals"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:9
+msgid ""
+"**Who is the primary audience of this site?** Being specific will help "
+"you shape the site; \"people interested in historic architecture\" is "
+"much more useful than \"the general public.\" Do you have secondary "
+"audiences? What do you want these specific audiences to accomplish when "
+"they come to the site?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:11
+msgid ""
+"**What are the goals of your site?** What do you want your specific "
+"audiences to accomplish when they come to the site? What do you want "
+"people to take away from the site? What content do you want to highlight?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:13
+msgid "Resources"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:15
+msgid ""
+"**What will you do with items in this website?** [Items](content/items) "
+"are the building blocks of Omeka S. What sort of [resource "
+"templates](content/resource-template) will you want to create and use to "
+"fully describe your items? Any item you include on an Omeka S will have a"
+" public item show page, so try to ensure that the information in an "
+"item's metadata can stand on its own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:18
+msgid ""
+"**What will you do with item sets?** You can use [item sets](content"
+"/item-sets) to group items to be included on a [site](sites/index), and "
+"they can be a way to guide visitors' browsing on your sites. For some "
+"sites, item sets are robust resources themselves."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:21
+msgid ""
+"How do you want to group items into sets? What metadata fields will your "
+"item sets use? Do your item sets have relations to each other or to "
+"items?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:23
+msgid ""
+"**What do you want your data to do?** What properties are you going to "
+"want to consistently describe in your site? Do you want some of these to "
+"display with a different label - for example 'author' instead of "
+"'creator' for books? Use a [resource template](content/resource-template)"
+" and change the label of the property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:26
+msgid ""
+"In Omeka S, items and item sets can use other resources - items, item "
+"sets, and media - as properties; for example, you can make an item for "
+"William Shakespeare and have that item fill the 'creator' property for a "
+"'Hamlet' item. How can your resources use this functionality?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:28
+msgid ""
+"Do you want to use a set of terms (controlled vocabulary) for certain "
+"items? You might want to use [Custom Vocab](modules/customvocab). Or do "
+"you want to use a terms list created by the Library of Congress or the "
+"Getty? Then you might use [Vocab Suggest](modules/valuesuggest)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:30
+msgid "Building a site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:31
+msgid ""
+"With Omeka S you will build your site from the ground up, which means you"
+" need to give some thought to how you want to organize your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:33
+msgid ""
+"What pages do you want to include? What kind of content do you want on "
+"these pages? How do you want to arrange them? Try sketching out a sample "
+"menu or wireframes for the site. Use that as a guide as you build your "
+"pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:35
+msgid ""
+"Pages are made up of [blocks](sites/site_pages.md#page-blocks), which can"
+" include text, images, and much more. What kind of content do you want on"
+" the pages you build? Bear in mind that you can rearrange page blocks as "
+"you build, so you can play around with the order of the content on your "
+"pages if you need to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/s-planning-tips.md:37
+msgid ""
+"How do you want to interact with your visitors on your site? Do you want "
+"to [collect](modules/collecting) resources from your visitors? Allow them"
+" to [share](modules/sharing) your content on social media?"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/search.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/search.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..95e5145a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/search.po
@@ -0,0 +1,430 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:1
+msgid "Searching"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:3
+msgid ""
+"There are search functions on both the administrative and public sides of"
+" Omeka S installs and sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:5
+msgid "Administrative interface"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:7 ../../docs/search.md:143
+msgid "Basic search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:9
+msgid ""
+"There is a search field near the top of the left-hand menu, just "
+"underneath the user information. This search field works as a keyword "
+"search across all the properties for a resource."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:11
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:13
+msgid ""
+"By default, this search operates on items in your installation. However, "
+"you can use the ellipses (three dots) to open a menu and change the "
+"resource type being searched, selecting from Items, Item Sets, or Media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:15
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:17
+msgid "Item advanced search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Advanced search for items only is available on the [Items](content/items)"
+" page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:23 ../../docs/search.md:66 ../../docs/search.md:108
+msgid "The advanced search loads on a new page, and has the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:25
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:27 ../../docs/search.md:161
+msgid ""
+"*Search full-text:* runs a full-text search on all of the text for every "
+"item in the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:29 ../../docs/search.md:70 ../../docs/search.md:112
+msgid "*Search by value:* search for a term or phrase which you enter"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:31 ../../docs/search.md:72 ../../docs/search.md:114
+#: ../../docs/search.md:165 ../../docs/search.md:201
+msgid "The first selector allows you to specify a property to search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:32 ../../docs/search.md:73 ../../docs/search.md:115
+#: ../../docs/search.md:167 ../../docs/search.md:203
+msgid ""
+"The second selector allows you to set the relationship the property has "
+"with the value. The options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:33 ../../docs/search.md:74 ../../docs/search.md:116
+#: ../../docs/search.md:168 ../../docs/search.md:204
+msgid "is exactly,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:34 ../../docs/search.md:75 ../../docs/search.md:117
+#: ../../docs/search.md:169 ../../docs/search.md:205
+msgid "is not exactly,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:35 ../../docs/search.md:76 ../../docs/search.md:118
+#: ../../docs/search.md:170 ../../docs/search.md:206
+msgid "contains,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:36 ../../docs/search.md:77 ../../docs/search.md:119
+#: ../../docs/search.md:171 ../../docs/search.md:207
+msgid "does not contain,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:37 ../../docs/search.md:78 ../../docs/search.md:120
+#: ../../docs/search.md:172 ../../docs/search.md:208
+msgid "is resource with ID,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:38 ../../docs/search.md:79 ../../docs/search.md:121
+#: ../../docs/search.md:173 ../../docs/search.md:209
+msgid "is not resource with ID,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:39 ../../docs/search.md:80 ../../docs/search.md:122
+#: ../../docs/search.md:174 ../../docs/search.md:210
+msgid "has any value (there is something in the property), and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:40 ../../docs/search.md:81 ../../docs/search.md:123
+#: ../../docs/search.md:175 ../../docs/search.md:211
+msgid "has no values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:41 ../../docs/search.md:82 ../../docs/search.md:124
+#: ../../docs/search.md:176 ../../docs/search.md:212
+msgid ""
+"Finally, there is a text field for you to enter the value you want the "
+"property to have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:43 ../../docs/search.md:84 ../../docs/search.md:126
+#: ../../docs/search.md:178 ../../docs/search.md:214
+msgid ""
+"To find a resource ID, go to the resource and look at the url in your "
+"browser's address bar. The numbers at the end of the url are the resource"
+" ID."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:45 ../../docs/search.md:180 ../../docs/search.md:216
+msgid ""
+"*Search by class:* select a class by which to search from the dropdown "
+"menu"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:47 ../../docs/search.md:90 ../../docs/search.md:132
+msgid ""
+"*Search by template:* select a resource template from the dropdown. "
+"Templates are arranged by owner, then alphabetically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:49 ../../docs/search.md:182
+msgid "*Search by item set:* select from a dropdown of item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:51
+msgid ""
+"*Search by site:* select a site from a dropdown of sites in the "
+"installation. Note that you can only search for items from one site at a "
+"time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:53
+msgid ""
+"*In site pool:* select from a dropdown menu of all the sites on the Omeka"
+" S installation, sorted by user-owner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:55
+msgid ""
+"Searches by value, class, template, and item set allow you to search by "
+"more than one input - use the large red *add new* buttons to search with "
+"more than one value or item set. These search terms build - searching for"
+" two item sets will return all items in either item set, rather than only"
+" those items which are in both."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:57 ../../docs/search.md:98
+msgid ""
+"You can remove value and item set searches using the red trash can icon "
+"to the right of those search options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:59 ../../docs/search.md:100 ../../docs/search.md:138
+msgid ""
+"You can reset your search terms at any time by using the \"Reset\" button"
+" on the upper right next to the \"Search\" button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:61
+msgid "Media advanced search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:62
+msgid ""
+"Advanced search for media is accessed from the [Media](content/media) "
+"browse page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of item "
+"sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:64
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:68
+msgid ""
+"*Search full-text:* runs a full-text search on all of the text for every "
+"media resource in the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:86 ../../docs/search.md:128
+msgid ""
+"You can remove value searches using the red trash can icon to the right "
+"of the value settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:88 ../../docs/search.md:130
+msgid ""
+"*Search by Class:* select a class by which to search from the dropdown "
+"menu"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:92
+msgid ""
+"*Search by MIME type:* you can specify the media type for the search. For"
+" example, to find all tiff images, you would enter `image/tiff`."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:94
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:96 ../../docs/search.md:136
+msgid ""
+"Searches by value, class, and template allow you to search by more than "
+"one input - use the *add new* buttons to search with more than one value "
+"or item set. These search terms build - searching for two templates will "
+"return all media using either template."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:102
+msgid "Item Set advanced search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:104
+msgid ""
+"Advanced search for item sets only is accessed on the [Item Sets](content"
+"/item-sets) page, from the *Advanced Search* link above the table of item"
+" sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:106
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:110 ../../docs/search.md:197
+msgid ""
+"*Search full-text:* runs a full-text search on all of the text for every "
+"item set in the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:134
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:140
+msgid "Public views"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:141
+msgid ""
+"The exact appearance of the search interface will vary based on the "
+"[theme](sites/site_theme) selected. However, the way search works should "
+"be consistent regardless of theme. All of the screenshots in this section"
+" are from a site using the the Default theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:144
+msgid ""
+"There is a search bar near the menu for each site. In the default theme, "
+"it is located just beneath the main menu, as shown in the image below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:146
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:148
+msgid ""
+"This search bar works as a full-text search for the whole site. It will "
+"search all of the items, item sets, and media as well as the content of "
+"every page published on the site. Results are sorted by type, grouping "
+"together page results and item or item set results. From the initial "
+"results page, you can view all the results for that type (page, item) "
+"using the \"view all results\" link."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:150
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:152
+msgid "If the ["
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:154
+msgid "Advanced item search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:155
+msgid ""
+"Site visitors can access an advanced item search from the Browse Items "
+"page, if you have that page accessible. There is a link for Advanced "
+"search between the pagination and the sort options at the top of the item"
+" browse table."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:157
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:159
+msgid "Clicking this loads a new page with four options for search:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:163 ../../docs/search.md:199
+msgid "*Search by value:* search for a term or phrase using multiple options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:166 ../../docs/search.md:202
+msgid ""
+"Note that if you have have the [site "
+"settings](sites/site_settings.md#search) to restrict search to templates,"
+" this will only display the properties used by those templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:184
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:186
+msgid ""
+"Searches by value, class, and item set allow a visitor to search by more "
+"than one input; they can use the *add new* buttons to search with more "
+"than one search term. These search terms build - searching for two item "
+"sets will return all items in either item set, rather than only those "
+"items which are in both."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:188 ../../docs/search.md:222
+msgid ""
+"Site visitors can remove value and item set searches using the red trash "
+"can icon to the right of those search options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:190
+msgid "Advanced item set search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:191
+msgid ""
+"Site visitors can access an advanced item set search from the Browse "
+"Items Sets page, if you have that page accessible. There is a link for "
+"Advanced search on the upper left of the Item Sets page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:193
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:195
+msgid ""
+"Clicking the advanced search link loads a new page with three options for"
+" search:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:218
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/search.md:220
+msgid ""
+"Searches by value and class allow a visitor to search by more than one "
+"input; they can use the *add new* buttons to search with more than one "
+"search term. These search terms build - searching for two classes will "
+"return all item sets which have either class."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/index.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/index.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eee598ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/index.po
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:1
+msgid "Sites Management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Sites are the public-facing side of an Omeka-S installation. With sites "
+"you can create content and interpretation around a group of items from "
+"your installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Sites are managed and access via the *Sites* tab on the left-hand side of"
+" the administrative dashboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:7
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:9
+msgid ""
+"The manage sites page displays a table with all the sites for the "
+"installation, giving the title and owner for each site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:11
+msgid ""
+"Use the two drop-downs on the right side above the table to sort sites. "
+"You can sort by *title*, *URL slug* or *owner*, either ascending or "
+"descending. Click the sort button to apply your choices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Above the table of sites, on the left, is the pagination for the item "
+"sets table, where you can click the left and right arrows to move forward"
+" and back or enter a page number to go a specific page of item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:15
+msgid ""
+"Each row gives the title of a site, options to *view* (box with outward "
+"arrow), *edit* (pencil), or *delete* (trash can), and displays the owner "
+"of the site. *Only global admins and site owners can delete a site.*"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:17
+msgid ""
+"Sites which are not public will have the private icon (an eye with a "
+"slash through it) display to the right of the site title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the site title will take you to a summary page for the site "
+"which displays the site’s *url slug,* and *title,* from which you can "
+"return to the site list using a button on the left side of the scree, or "
+"*edit* or *view* the site using buttons in the upper right"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:23
+msgid "Adding a site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:24
+msgid ""
+"To create a site, click the *Add new site* button in the upper right-hand"
+" corner of the site browse page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:26
+msgid "The Add New Site page has three tabs: Admin, Theme, and Item Pool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:28
+msgid "The Admin tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:29
+msgid "Give your site a *title* (required)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:30
+msgid ""
+"create a *slug* for the site’s url. The url will be "
+"*installurl/site/slug*. This is optional - if you leave this field blank,"
+" Omeka S will create a slug based on the site title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:31
+msgid ""
+"Create a *summary* for your site, a brief idea of what it is about which "
+"will appear on your installation's landing page and on [list of site "
+"blocks](site_pages.md#page-blocks)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:33
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:35
+msgid "The Theme tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Select from the installed themes. Each theme appears as a button with a "
+"screenshot of the theme, the theme name, and a link to its creator. When "
+"a theme is selected, it will highlight slightly in gray and a checkbox "
+"will appear in the bottom right corner of the button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:38
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:40
+msgid "Publication settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:41
+msgid ""
+"In the upper right hand corner of the screen, next to the *Add* button, "
+"you can set the visibility of your site using the the *make "
+"public/private* button (eye icon)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:43
+msgid ""
+" Public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:45
+msgid ""
+" Private"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:47
+msgid ""
+"You will probably want to leave the site Private until you have added "
+"some content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:49
+msgid "Add site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:50
+msgid ""
+"When you are ready, click the Add button in the upper right corner. Once "
+"the page is created, you will be redirected to the site info tab of the "
+"site management."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:52
+msgid ""
+"If you decide you do not want to create this site, click the Cancel "
+"button in the upper right next to the Add button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:54
+msgid "Manage a site"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:55
+msgid ""
+"To manage a site, navigate to the *Sites* tab from the Omeka S Admin "
+"Dashboard. Click either on the site’s title or the edit (pencil) button "
+"in the list of sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:57
+msgid ""
+"This will take you to the Site Info page, and open the context menu for "
+"that site in the left hand navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:59
+msgid ""
+"The context menu for every site has the site title at the top, with an "
+"icon of a computer (the site icon) to the right. To the left of the site "
+"title is a view button (box with escaping arrow). Clicking the view "
+"button will open the public side of the site in a new window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:61
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:63
+msgid "Site admin left hand navigation options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:65
+msgid "*[Site Admin](../sites/site_settings.md)*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:66
+msgid "*[Pages](../sites/site_pages.md)*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:67
+msgid "*[Navigation](../sites/site_navigation.md)*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:68
+msgid "*[Resources](../sites/site_resources.md)*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:69
+msgid "*[User Permissions](../sites/site_users.md)*,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:70
+msgid "*[Theme](../sites/site_theme.md)*, and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:71
+msgid "Modules, if installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:73
+msgid ""
+"Any modules which you have installed that have site-specific settings "
+"will appear below the site Settings tab in the site's context menu. In "
+"the image above, the modules Metadata Browse and Collecting are "
+"installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/index.md:75
+msgid ""
+"The standard options in the left hand navigation of the Omeka S Admin "
+"(items, item sets, etc) are still available below the site context menu."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_navigation.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_navigation.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e99269b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_navigation.po
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:1
+msgid "Navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Use the *Navigation* tab of the [Sites](../sites/index.md) to manage the "
+"navigation, or menu, or your site. You can add links, browse pages, and "
+"your [pages](../sites/site_pages.md) to the navigation, arrange them, and"
+" delete links from the navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:5
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:8
+msgid ""
+"For every item in the navigation, you have three options: view (box with "
+"arrow icon); edit (pencil icon); or delete (trash can icon). Parent "
+"navigation pages also have a gray square with a black triangle which "
+"collapses or expands their child pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:10
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:12
+msgid "Set Homepage"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:13
+msgid ""
+"By default, the topmost page in the navigation acts the main page for "
+"your site. Note that custom URLs will not work as a home page - the "
+"topmost item in your navigation must be a page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:15
+msgid ""
+"You can set the homepage without changing the order of your pages using "
+"the *Select a homepage* section in the righthand drawer. This section has"
+" a dropdown which lists all the pages in your site. Simply select the "
+"page which you want to use as your homepage."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:17
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:19
+msgid ""
+"To change which page is used as the homepage, select a different page "
+"from the dropdown. If you want to revert to using the top page in the "
+"navigation, click the 'x' to the right of the page name in the menu "
+"(circled in red in the below image)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:21
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:24
+msgid "Adding Navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:25
+msgid ""
+"Add to the navigation of the site using the options on the right hand "
+"side of the page. There are two sections: [Add a custom link](#add-a"
+"-custom-link) and [Add a link to a site page](#site-page)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:27
+msgid "Add a custom link"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:28
+msgid ""
+"To add a link you can use the *Add a custom link* options on the right "
+"hand drawer to add:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:29
+msgid "a *Custom URL* to any web address;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:30
+msgid "a Browse page for items on your site;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:31
+msgid "a Browse page for item sets on your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Or you can add one of your [pages](../sites/site_pages), which should be "
+"listed in the right-hand drawer below the *Add a custom link* dropdown. "
+"If you need to find a specific page, begin typing the page title in the "
+"search box with the helper text *Filter pages* which appears directly "
+"below the text “Add a link to a site page.”"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:35
+msgid ""
+"**Custom URL** link blocks display three pieces of information: the block"
+" *type* (Custom URL), the *label* which is the text which will appear in "
+"the site navigation menu, and the *url*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:37
+msgid ""
+" URL Block"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:39
+msgid ""
+"**Browse** blocks create a browse page for "
+"[resources](../sites/site_resources.md) already associated with your "
+"site. There are blocks to create a browse items page and a block to "
+"browse item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:41
+msgid ""
+"You can change the *label* of the block to reflect what, specifically, "
+"site visitors will browse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:43
+msgid ""
+"If you want to refine the Browse block, you can use the Query to create a"
+" search query that returns the desired results."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:45
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:47
+msgid "Note that you **must** enter a query for the block to function."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:49
+msgid ""
+"To create a Browse Item Set navigation for all the item sets which you "
+"have already assigned to the [resources](../sites/site_resources/) with "
+"the site on which you are working:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:51
+msgid ""
+"(In a separate window): conduct an [advanced item set "
+"search](../search.md#advanced-item-set-search) using your site for the "
+"\"In site pool\" option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:52
+msgid ""
+"Once the search results load, highlight everything in your browser's "
+"address bar starting with the question mark all the way to the end of the"
+" search url (to the right)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:54
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:56
+msgid ""
+"Paste the text you just copied into the \"Query\" field of the Browse "
+"item sets Navigation link."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:58
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:60
+msgid "Site Page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:61
+msgid ""
+"Site page blocks create links to pages you have built for your site. The "
+"*page* field indicates which page is in use, as does the block title. You"
+" can change the *label* for the page link in the navigation, as in the "
+"example image below. Note that changing the label does not change the "
+"page title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:63
+msgid ""
+" Site Page block"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:65
+msgid ""
+"If you have many pages, you can use the *Filter pages* field to find the "
+"names and slugs of specific pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:67
+msgid ""
+"Be sure to click Save before leaving the Navigation tab to save changes. "
+"If you do not want to save changes, click the Cancel button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:69
+msgid "Editing and Arranging Navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:70
+msgid ""
+"When you add a link block it is automatically expanded. To collapse an "
+"open link block, click the edit (pencil) icon in the upper right corner "
+"of each block, next to the delete (trash) icon. When you arrive at the "
+"Navigation tab after saving changes or from the main site edit page, the "
+"navigation items should be collapsed; open the block by clicking the edit"
+" (pencil) icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:72
+msgid "The topmost item in the navigation is the main page for your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:74
+msgid ""
+"You can arrange your navigation links by dragging and dropping them into "
+"your preferred order. Nest links by dragging the desired child link on "
+"top of the desired parent link; when you do so a small black triangle "
+"should appear to the left of the parent block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:76
+msgid ""
+" In this image, Custard page"
+" 2 is the child link; Opening Page will be the parent link, as indicated "
+"by the small black triangle on the left"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:78
+msgid "Omeka S allows for multiple levels of nested navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:80
+msgid "Deleting Navigation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:81
+msgid ""
+"To delete a link from the navigation, click the delete (trash can) icon "
+"and then click *Save*. If you accidentally click the delete icon, you can"
+" click the undo (back looped arrow) icon before click save to cancel the "
+"deletion."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:83
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:85
+msgid ""
+"In this image, the delete icon for browse has been clicked; the block now"
+" displays the undo button instead"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:87
+msgid ""
+"NOTE: Deleting a parent block from the navigation will also delete any "
+"child blocks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_navigation.md:89
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_pages.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_pages.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54f559e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_pages.po
@@ -0,0 +1,853 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:1
+msgid "Pages Management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:3
+msgid ""
+"Pages form the content of your [sites](../sites/index.md). A site can "
+"have a single page or many pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:5
+msgid ""
+"Manage the pages for a site by navigating to the Sites tab on the left-"
+"hand navigation of the admin dashboard. Select the site for which you "
+"want to manage the pages and click either the title or the edit (pencil) "
+"button to edit that site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Once you are editing the site, click the Pages tab in the left hand "
+"navigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:9
+msgid ""
+"When you create a new site, Omeka S automatically adds a page titled "
+"*Welcome* with a single HTML block (see below). You can edit this page or"
+" delete it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:11
+msgid "Adding Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:12
+msgid ""
+"From the page for the site, click the Pages tab. Then click the *Add new "
+"page* button on the upper left side of the window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:14
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:16
+msgid "To add a page you must enter a *Title*. You can also enter a *URL Slug*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Both of these can be edited later but are required to create the page. If"
+" you do not enter a slug, Omeka S will create one from the page title. A "
+"slug is the page’s portion of the url and can only contain letters, "
+"numbers, and hyphens; no other characters are allowed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:21
+msgid ""
+"In addition, there is a checkbox for \"Add to navigation\". If checked, "
+"the page will automatically appear at the main "
+"[navigation](../sites/site_navigation.md) level for the site. If you do "
+"not check this box, you will have to manually add the page to the site "
+"navigation at a later point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:23
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:25
+msgid ""
+"The eye icon to the left of the Cancel and Add buttons is a toggle to set"
+" the visibility of your page. If the toggle is set to public (no line), "
+"then anyone can see the page. If the toggle is set to private (line "
+"through the eye icon), the page will only be visible to logged-in users "
+"of the Omeka S installation who have site permissions (Supervisors and "
+"Global Admins will always be able to see private pages)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Clicking or hitting enter on the eye icon toggles between public and "
+"private."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:29
+msgid ""
+" Public"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:31
+msgid ""
+" Private"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:33
+msgid ""
+"Once you have entered this information and set visibility, click the Add "
+"button in the upper right hand corner of the browser window. You will be "
+"automatically taken to that page's edit view (see below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:35
+msgid "If you decide you do not want to create the page, click the Cancel button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:37
+msgid "Browse Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:38
+msgid ""
+"The pages tab (once you have at least one page) will display all of your "
+"pages in their navigation order. Child pages will display below the "
+"parent page with a `-` before the page title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:40
+msgid ""
+"Every page is listed with its *Title*, buttons to view (box with an arrow"
+" coming out), edit (pencil), or delete (trash can) the page, and the "
+"page's slug."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:42
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:44
+msgid ""
+"Use the [Navigation](../sites/site_navigation/) tab of the site admin to "
+"set the order of pages, including setting child and parent pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:46
+msgid "Editing Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:47
+msgid ""
+"After clicking the Pages tab, select the page you wish to edit by "
+"clicking the name of the page or the edit button (pencil). Note: clicking"
+" on the Page *title* will take you to the public view of that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:49
+msgid ""
+"The edit view for a page will display the page's title across the top. In"
+" the upper left is the public/private toggle (the eye icon), and buttons "
+"to view the public version (opens in a new tab), delete the page, cancel "
+"changes, or save changes. Note that changes will not display on the "
+"public view until after they have been saved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:51
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the work area are fields for the page title and URL slug. "
+"You can edit these at any time, but remember that the slug must be unique"
+" within the site (you cannot have two pages with the slug \"welcome\" on "
+"the same site)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:53
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:55
+msgid ""
+"On the right hand side you can choose to add a new block by selecting one"
+" of the following layouts:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:56 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:92
+msgid "HTML"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:57
+msgid "Page title"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:58 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:117
+msgid "Media Embed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:59
+msgid "Browse preview"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:60
+msgid "Item showcase"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:61 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:223
+msgid "List of sites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:62
+msgid "Table of contents"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:63
+msgid "Line break"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:64
+msgid ""
+"Item with metadata If you have the relevant modules installed, you may "
+"also have:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:67
+msgid "Map"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:68
+msgid "Collecting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:70
+msgid ""
+"Once you have added blocks to your page, click the Save button in the "
+"right hand corner. To leave without saving changes, click Cancel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:72
+msgid ""
+"You can delete any of the blocks by clicking on the trash can icon "
+"located in the upper right corner of the block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:74
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:76
+msgid ""
+"Change the order of blocks by clicking on the three horizontal lines on "
+"the upper left corner of the block and then dragging and dropping it to "
+"the desired location."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:78
+msgid ""
+"Some modules may create additional blocks for your site pages. For "
+"information on working with these blocks, please see the documentation "
+"for that [module](../modules/index.md)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:80
+msgid "From the Public Side"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:81
+msgid ""
+"If you are on the admin side and click \"View\" in the upper right-hand "
+"corner of a page, it will take you to the public view for that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:83
+msgid ""
+"As you are browsing the public side of your site, you can edit the page "
+"you are viewing if you are currently logged in and the [user bar option "
+"is turned on in Site Settings](site_settings.md#general-settings)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:85
+msgid ""
+"The user bar, which appears across the top of the page, includes a link "
+"to edit the current page - circled in red in the below image."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:87
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:89
+msgid "Page Blocks"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:90
+msgid ""
+"Pages are made up of blocks, each of which has a different form of "
+"content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:93
+msgid ""
+"Creates an HTML box in which you can add formatted text and links. When "
+"you click in the box, a formatting menu will display above the text "
+"field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:95
+msgid "Basic block:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:97
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:99
+msgid "With formatting menu open:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:101
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:103
+msgid ""
+"You can embed content from elsewhere on the internet using iFrames or "
+"other embed codes in the HTML block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:105
+msgid ""
+"Click into the HTML block content area to show the formatting menu and "
+"then click on the button labeled \"Source\". "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:106
+msgid "This will open a dialog box where you can write HTML content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:107
+msgid ""
+"Copy and paste the embed code into the source code editor. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:108
+msgid "Click the green OK button at the bottom of the editor."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:109
+msgid ""
+"Your embed should show up in the HTML block either as a gray rectangle or"
+" as the embedded content. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:112
+msgid "Page Title"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:113
+msgid "Displays the title of the current page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:115
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:118
+msgid ""
+"Creates a block with one or more pieces of media associated with items in"
+" the item pool. In media blocks, multiple attachments stack vertically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:120
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:122
+msgid "The Media block has options for the display of the media:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:124
+msgid "Thumbnail type: choose from large, medium, and square."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:125
+msgid "Thumbnail alignment: float left, float right, and center."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:126
+msgid "Set the attachment title as:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:127 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:191
+msgid "item title (title of the attached item);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:128 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:192
+msgid ""
+"media title (title of the specific piece of media you select associated "
+"with the item); or"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:129 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:193
+msgid "no title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:131
+msgid ""
+"*Layout note:* If you want media to appear beside a block of text, place "
+"a media block *above* an HTML block, select a smaller thumbnail size, and"
+" choose either float left or right for alignment. In the example below, "
+"the media has a thumbnail type of \"medium\", alignment \"float right,\" "
+"and attachment title of the \"item title\":"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:134
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:136
+msgid ""
+"Placing a media block *after* an HTML block will cause the media to "
+"appear below the end of the HTML paragraphs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:138
+msgid "To **add media to the block**, click the *add attachment* button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:140
+msgid ""
+"On loading, the drawer will show a list of your items, most recent first."
+" You can select from the first page, page through using the forward and "
+"back arrows, or search using the search bar. You can select from the "
+"first page, page through using the forward and back arrows, or search "
+"using the search bar."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:142
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:144 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:197
+msgid ""
+"If you have a large number of items to navigate, or multiple items with "
+"the same title, you can use the \"Filter search\" options by clicking the"
+" triangle button to the right of its label."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:146 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:199
+msgid "These options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:148 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:201
+msgid ""
+"Filter by class: opens a dropdown to select from all of the classes for "
+"the vocabularies in the Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:149 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:202
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item set: opens a dropdown to select from all item sets in the "
+"installation, not just those associated with the site on which you are "
+"working."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:150 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:203
+msgid ""
+"Filter by item id: you can put in the specific item id for an item (the "
+"number which appears in the url when you are looking at the item on the "
+"admin)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:152
+msgid ""
+"Once you have applied your changes to the filter, you must click the "
+"search button (magnifying glass) to apply the filters or run the search."
+" "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:155 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:209
+msgid ""
+"Once you’ve selected an item, the drawer will shift to that item’s "
+"information. You can add a caption and select which media (if more than "
+"one) you want to use. To return to the list of items, click the *Select "
+"item* button at the top of the drawer. To use the item displayed and "
+"apply the caption, etc, click the *Apply changes* button at the bottom of"
+" the drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:157 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:211
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:159 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:213
+msgid ""
+"To add multiple items at once, click the \"quick add\" slider just above "
+"the list of items in the right hand drawer. This will add a checkbox to "
+"the left of each item. Check the boxes of those items you want to add to "
+"the block, then click the \"Add selected\" button at the bottom of the "
+"drawer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:161 ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:215
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:163
+msgid "Browse Preview"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:164
+msgid "Allows you to add a block of items on a site page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:166
+msgid ""
+"In order to create a Browse Preview block, you'll first need to perform a"
+" search on your Omeka S installation for the items you want to include. "
+"You can use the general search on the left hand navigation or, if you "
+"want to show all items in an item set, use the Advanced Search from Items"
+" browse. NB: if you leave the search options blank, the browse preview "
+"will load all items in your site's item pool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:168
+msgid ""
+"Once you have searched, highlight everything in your browser's address "
+"bar starting with the question mark all the way to the end of the search "
+"url (to the right)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:170
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:172
+msgid ""
+"From the *Resource type* dropdown, choose the kind of resource you want "
+"to display in the block: Items, Item Sets, or Media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:173
+msgid ""
+"In the *Query* field of the Browse Preview block, paste the part of the "
+"url you just copied (everything from the question mark over)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:174
+msgid ""
+"The *Limit* field lets you set the number of resources to display in the "
+"block; any additional results from your query can be accessed on a search"
+" page linked from the bottom of the block (you set the text of the link "
+"in the *browse link text* field below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:175
+msgid ""
+"The *Preview Title* field sets the heading above the browse section on "
+"the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:176
+msgid ""
+"The *Browse link text* field sets the link text at the bottom of the "
+"block - the block will only display as many results as you set in the "
+"*Limit* field above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:178
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:180
+msgid "Item Showcase"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:181
+msgid "A list of items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:183
+msgid ""
+"In item showcase blocks, multiple attachments build horizontally, "
+"creating rows across the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:185
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:187
+msgid "Using the drop-down menu in the block, you can:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:189
+msgid ""
+"set the thumbnail size for these items as large (default), medium, or "
+"square."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:190
+msgid "set the attachment title as:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:195
+msgid ""
+"Click the *Add Attachment* button to add an item to the block. This will "
+"open a drawer on the right side of the page to browse and select items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:205
+msgid ""
+"Once you have applied your changes to the filter, you must click the "
+"search button (magnifying glass) to apply the filters or run the search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:207
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:217
+msgid ""
+"To cancel the item selection, click the X in the upper right corner of "
+"the drawer at any time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:219
+msgid ""
+"Once you’ve added an item, it will appear in the Item List block. You can"
+" edit the caption or media options by clicking the edit (wrench) button "
+"for that row, and you can delete the item using the delete (trash can) "
+"icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:221
+msgid "You can add multiple items to the list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:224
+msgid ""
+"This block displays a list of all of the sites on your Omeka S install. "
+"This block has the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:226
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:228
+msgid ""
+"Sort sites by: Alphabetical order (A-Z); Oldest first; newest first. By "
+"default this is set to alphabetical."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:229
+msgid ""
+"Max number of sites allows you to limit the number of sites which display"
+" at once. If left blank, all sites will display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:230
+msgid "A checkbox to turn on pagination, applied only if you set a limit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:231
+msgid "A checkbox to show site summaries."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:232
+msgid "A checkbox to exclude the current site from the list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:234
+msgid ""
+"This image shows a List of sites block, sorted oldest first, with no "
+"limits:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:236
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:238
+msgid ""
+"This is the same block edited to have a limit of 5 and pagination is "
+"turned on:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:240
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:242
+msgid "The same block with pagination and site summaries turned on:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:244
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:246
+msgid "Table of Contents"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:247
+msgid ""
+"If the current page has child pages, you can add a table of content block"
+" for those pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:249
+msgid ""
+"The Depth option allows you to set how many levels of child pages you "
+"want to display. If left blank, it will display all possible levels. "
+"Please enter a whole number."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:251
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:253
+msgid ""
+"Add and arrange pages using the [Site "
+"Navigation](../sites/site_navigation.md) settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:255
+msgid "Line Break"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:256
+msgid ""
+"Line break creates a transparent or opaque line break on the page, "
+"clearing all blocks. Select whether the line is transparent or opaque "
+"from the dropdown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:258
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:260
+msgid ""
+"HTML blocks wrap around Media blocks and at times you may want to clear "
+"the page. You might also want to create a visual break on the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:262
+msgid "Item with Metadata"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:263
+msgid ""
+"This block displays an item along with all associated metadata (entered "
+"when creating or editing the [item](../content/items.md))."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:265
+msgid ""
+"Add attachments in the same manner as the [media](#media-embed) page "
+"block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:267
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:269
+msgid "Other blocks"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:270
+msgid ""
+"For module-specific blocks (like [Collecting](../modules/collecting.md) "
+"or [Map](../modules/mapping.md)) see the documentation for that module."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:272
+msgid "Deleting Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:273
+msgid ""
+"To delete a page, go the to *Pages* tab of the site of which the page is "
+"a part. Click the delete (trash can) button at the right end of the row "
+"for that page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:275
+msgid ""
+"A drawer will open on the right side of the page asking you to confirm "
+"that you wish to delete the page, with the name of the page displayed "
+"under the confirm button. To proceed, click the *Confirm delete* button. "
+"Otherwise, click the *X* in the upper right corner of the drawer to "
+"cancel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_pages.md:277
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_resources.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_resources.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1440b768
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_resources.po
@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:1
+msgid "Resources"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Resources tab of the site context menu allows you to set what Items "
+"and Item Sets are available on your site's browse pages. The Items tab "
+"also sets which items are available in the sidebar when building pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:5
+msgid "Resources has two tabs across the top of the window: Items and Item Sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:7
+msgid ""
+"Under the Items tab, you can set the items available for selection and "
+"browse in your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:9
+msgid ""
+"Item Sets is where you select the sets which will show up on the Browse "
+"Item Sets page, should you choose to include it"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:11
+msgid ""
+"**Note** The two tabs operate *independently* from each other. The "
+"selections made on one will have no effect on the other. The Items tab "
+"limits which items are available, while the Item Set tab limits which "
+"sets are visible for public browsing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:13
+msgid "Items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:15
+msgid ""
+"The Items tab determines what automatically appears in the resource "
+"selection options on the [pages](../sites/site_pages.md) of your Omeka S "
+"[site](../sites/index.md). It also limits the resources which appear on a"
+" browse page on your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:17
+msgid ""
+"When you first navigate the to items tab, it will display information "
+"about the number of items in the site and give you options for making "
+"changes. You will see:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:19
+msgid ""
+"A statement of the number of items current assigned to the site. Click on"
+" the number to open a new browser tab showing all of those items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:21
+msgid ""
+"A statement of whether the site automatically includes new items, and a "
+"link to the site admin to change that setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:23
+msgid ""
+"A table with the following options for managing your current items: \t- "
+"Do nothing: make no changes) \t- Add - keep existing items and assign "
+"items from a new search \t- Replace - unassign all items and assign items"
+" from a new search \t- Remove - unassign items from a new search \t- "
+"Remove all - unassign all items"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:30
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:32
+msgid ""
+"If you want to make changes to the item sources in your site, select the "
+"radio button for the action you want to take. For all but \"Do nothing\" "
+"and \"Remove all\", a search form will automatically load."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:34
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:36
+msgid ""
+"Note that the search options in the form work together to build an "
+"overall search. If you had the search in the image above, looking for "
+"items where \"Creator\" contains the word \"Doyle\" and you added a "
+"criteria where Class=Text, it would only add items to your pool which "
+"matched *both* statements."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:38
+msgid ""
+"Above the search fields is a button to Preview this search. Clicking the "
+"button after creating a search will open a new browser tab with the items"
+" which meet the criteria of the search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:40
+msgid ""
+"There is also a checkbox for \"keep this search\". Checking this box will"
+" re-load this search the next time you come to make changes to the site "
+"items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:42
+msgid "Search forms options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:44
+msgid "*Search full-text:* search all values of all items."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:46
+msgid "*Search by value:* search for a term or phrase which you enter"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:48
+msgid "The first selector allows you to specify a property to search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:49
+msgid ""
+"The second selector allows you to set the relationship the property has "
+"with the value. The options are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:50
+msgid "is exactly,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:51
+msgid "is not exactly,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:52
+msgid "contains,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:53
+msgid "does not contain,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:54
+msgid "is resource with ID,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:55
+msgid "is not resource with ID,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:56
+msgid "has any value (there is something in the property), and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:57
+msgid "has no values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:58
+msgid ""
+"Finally, there is a text field for you to enter the value you want the "
+"property to have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:60
+msgid ""
+"To find a resource ID, go to the resource and look at the url in your "
+"browser's address bar. The numbers at the end of the url are the resource"
+" ID."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:62
+msgid ""
+"*Search by Class:* select one or more classes from the dropdown menu - "
+"the search will only return items with this class."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:64
+msgid ""
+"*Search by template:* select from existing resource templates and the "
+"search will only return items using this resource template or templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:66
+msgid "*Search by item set:* select from a dropdown of item sets."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:68
+msgid "*Search by owner:* select from a dropdown of site users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:70
+msgid ""
+"Note that the fields for searches by value, class, template, and item set"
+" have a large red plus sign to the left of the select options. Use these "
+"to add more than one search of this kind to your form. You can use the "
+"red trash can icon to the right of the field to remove it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:72
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:74
+msgid "Item Sets"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:76
+msgid ""
+"On this tab you can select which Item Sets will display on a Browse Item "
+"Sets page when added to the [navigation](../sites/site_navigation.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:78
+msgid ""
+"The table in the Item Sets tab shows any item sets already added, with "
+"their title and owner's email address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:80
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:82
+msgid ""
+"To add an item set, select it in the right hand sidebar. You can find the"
+" desired item set by either:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:84
+msgid ""
+"typing the name of the item set in the search bar and then clicking on "
+"the correct item set, or"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:85
+msgid ""
+"click on the name of the item set owner, then clicking on the name of the"
+" item set."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:87
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:89
+msgid ""
+"Remove an item set by clicking the red delete button (trash can icon). It"
+" will still be available to re-add from the drawer on the right."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:91
+msgid ""
+"You can change the order of the item sets by dragging and dropping using "
+"the three-bar icon on the left end of the row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:93
+msgid ""
+"The following image shows a browse item sets public view using the "
+"default theme:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_resources.md:95
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_settings.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_settings.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c9c060b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_settings.po
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:1
+msgid "Site Admin"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Site Admin page allows you to manage the main settings for the "
+"[site](../sites/index.md) on which you are working. Changes will only be "
+"applied to this site and will not change other sites' settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:5
+msgid "It is the first tab under the site title, represented with a gear icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:7
+msgid "The Site Admin page has two tabs, Info and Settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:9
+msgid "Info"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:10
+msgid ""
+"The site info settings for an Omeka S site are where you can change the "
+"basic info for the site - the same information you entered when you "
+"created the site. You can change the:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:12
+msgid "*title* - a text field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:13
+msgid "*slug* - the url for your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:14
+msgid ""
+"*summary* - the brief description of what it is about which will appear "
+"on your installation's landing page and on [List of Site](site_pages.md"
+"#page-blocks) blocks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:16
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:18
+msgid ""
+"In the upper right hand corner of the window on this tab, you can use "
+"buttons to:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:20
+msgid "set your site as public or private using the eye icon button (see below);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:21
+msgid "*delete* the site;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:22
+msgid "*cancel* making changes; and"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:23
+msgid "*Ssave* changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:25
+msgid ""
+"The *make public/private* button (eye icon) is used to both indicate and "
+"set whether the site is visible to the public or only to users of this "
+"Omeka S installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:27
+msgid ""
+"Site is public:  Site is Private: "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:30
+msgid "Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:31
+msgid ""
+"The Settings page is divided into three sections: General, Browse, and "
+"Search."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:33
+msgid ""
+"To implement any changes you make, click Save at the top right of the "
+"browser window when you are done. To leave without saving changes, click "
+"cancel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:35
+msgid "General settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:37
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:39
+msgid ""
+"**Auto-assign new items** A checkbox which sets whether new items are "
+"automatically added to the site. If checked, every new item will be added"
+" to the site, regardless of the item's owner. Note that item owners may "
+"unassign their items from the site at any time, in the item's edit pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:41
+msgid ""
+"**Attachment link type** Sets the target of links from attachments you "
+"add to [site page blocks](site_pages.md#page-blocks) (for example, in an "
+"[item showcase](site_pages.md#item-showcase). It offers a dropdown with "
+"the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:43
+msgid ""
+"*item page:* clicking on the attachment takes users to the item page "
+"associated with the attached media;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:44
+msgid "*media page:* clicking on the attachment takes users to the media page;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:45
+msgid ""
+"*direct link to file:* clicking on the attachment takes user to the file "
+"alone."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:47
+msgid ""
+"**Embed media on item pages** is a checkbox. When checked, any linked "
+"media (such as videos) will be embedded on the item pages. When "
+"unchecked, site visitors will click through to view playable media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:49
+msgid ""
+"**Show page pagination** is also a checkbox. When checked, \"Previous\" "
+"and \"Next\" links will display at the bottom of every page in the site, "
+"proceeding through your navigation. If unchecked, these links will not "
+"display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:51
+msgid ""
+"**Show user bar on public views** sets whether there is a bar across the "
+"top of public site pages which allow users to access the admin side of "
+"the site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:53
+msgid "When users are logged in, the user bar has the following options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:55
+msgid "Installation Title: takes you back to the installation admin"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:56
+msgid ""
+"Site Title: takes you back to the landing page for managing the site "
+"(site/show)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:57
+msgid ""
+"Resource view: depending on what you are viewing, this is a link to the "
+"admin side management for [Pages](site_pages), [Items](../content/items),"
+" or [Item Sets](../content/item-sets)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:58
+msgid "Edit link for that page, item set, or item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:59
+msgid "User's display name: takes you to your user page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:60
+msgid "Logout: logs out current user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:62
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:64
+msgid "When users are not logged, the user bar only displays a login option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:66
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:68
+msgid "The options for this setting are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:70
+msgid "Never"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:71
+msgid "When identified (when logged in)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:72
+msgid "Always"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:74
+msgid ""
+"**Disable JSON-LD embed** Check this box to disable JSON-LD embedding on "
+"resource browse and show pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:76
+msgid ""
+"**Locale** is dropdown menu to select the language code for this site. By"
+" default this will be set to the same as the global locale setting for "
+"the entire Omeka S installation. To change, select a language from the "
+"dropdown menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:78
+msgid "Browse settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:80
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:82
+msgid ""
+"**Restrict browse to attached items** is a checkbox. If checked, the "
+"Browse functions of your site will only show items which have been added "
+"to a page block. If unchecked, browse pages and blocks on your site will "
+"include all items in the Item Pool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:84
+msgid ""
+"**Results per page** sets the number of results per page on browse pages "
+"by entering a number. If left blank, the site will use the default from "
+"the [global settings](../admin/settings)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:86
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the [site theme](../sites/site_theme), you may want to make "
+"this a multiple of 4 for a more elegant display. Note that using very "
+"large numbers (50, 75, 100) may cause browse pages to load slowly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:88
+msgid ""
+"**Browse heading property** sets which property to use as the heading for"
+" each resource on a browse page. By default, this is Dublin Core: Title. "
+"The dropdown allows you to select from all available vocabularies, and "
+"includes a search bar to quickly find the desired property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:90
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:93
+msgid ""
+"**Browse body property** sets which property to use as the body text for "
+"each resource on a browse page. By default, this is Dublin Core: "
+"Description. The dropdown allows you to select from all available "
+"vocabularies, and includes a search bar to quickly find the desired "
+"property."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:95
+msgid "Show"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:96
+msgid ""
+"When this box is checked, site pages to which an item is attached will "
+"display on the public view of that item."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:98
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:100
+msgid "Search"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:102
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:104
+msgid ""
+"**Search type** is a dropdown which allows you to set from which site(s) "
+"the search bar generates results:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:106
+msgid "This site: only return results from this site;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:107
+msgid "All sites: return results for all sites on the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:109
+msgid ""
+"**Search resources** is a series of checkboxes which let you select which"
+" types of resources are searched from the main search field on the site. "
+"Select from: site pages, items, and item sets. You can select all if you "
+"want."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:111
+msgid ""
+"**Templates** allows you to limit the properties for advanced item or "
+"item set search to only properties included in a template or templates. "
+"When this field is empty, the \"Search by Value\" on the advanced search "
+"will display all properties from all vocabularies in the Omeka S "
+"installation. Applying a template not only limits the options in the "
+"dropdown, it also includes your alternate labels for properties:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:113
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:115
+msgid ""
+"Click in the field to add a template; you can add more than one template "
+"by clicking in the field again."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_settings.md:117
+msgid ""
+"**Restrict to templates** will restrict search results to only those "
+"items which are using the selected templates."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_theme.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_theme.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..512205c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_theme.po
@@ -0,0 +1,416 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:1
+msgid "Theme Selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:3
+msgid ""
+"The Theme tab of the site context menu allows you to select the theme for"
+" your site, and to set theme-specific settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:5
+msgid "Select a Theme"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:7
+msgid ""
+"When you navigate to the Theme tab, the currently active theme will "
+"appear on the top of the page. If you did not select a theme when adding "
+"the site, this will be the Default theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:9
+msgid ""
+"A large image of the active appears on the left, with the theme Title, "
+"creator, and a button for Theme Settings on the right."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:11
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Below the current theme are buttons for all other installed themes. The "
+"buttons have a small image of the theme in action, the theme name, and a "
+"link to the creator of the theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:15
+msgid ""
+"To switch themes, click on the theme which you want to use. It should "
+"highlight slightly in gray, with a checkbox in the lower right-hand "
+"corner of the theme button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:17
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Click the Save button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to "
+"save changes. Click the Cancel button to leave without saving changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:21
+msgid "Theme Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:23
+msgid ""
+"Theme settings allow you to customize aspects of the site's theme, such "
+"as adding a logo to the top or writing footer text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:25
+msgid ""
+"To edit the settings of your selected theme, click on the button labeled "
+"*edit theme settings* to the right of the current theme thumbnail "
+"(highlighted with an arrow in the below image)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:27
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:29
+msgid ""
+"Note that your settings for a specific theme on a site will be saved even"
+" if you change themes. For example, if you customized the footer for the "
+"default theme, then switched to using The Daily for a while, then "
+"switched back to the default theme, your custom footer would still be "
+"there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:31
+msgid "Settings Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:32
+msgid ""
+"Depending on which theme you have selected, you may see any of the "
+"following setting options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:34
+msgid "Logo"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:35
+msgid ""
+"(All themes) Upload a asset (file) to function as a logo in the header of"
+" your site. Allowed file types are: jpg, gif, png, svg, and svgz."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:38
+msgid ""
+"This asset is not associated with any of the items, and will be stored "
+"separately; once uploaded to a site you will be able to select it again "
+"without re-uploading even if you change themes for a while. Any asset "
+"uploaded to one site will be available for all sites on the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:40
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:42
+msgid ""
+"To upload a logo, click the Select button. This will open a sidebar where"
+" you can either upload a new file from your computer or choose from "
+"assets already uploaded to the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:44
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:46
+msgid ""
+"Note that the logo completely replaces the header, including the site "
+"title, for the site, so you may want to consider an image with text if it"
+" is important to you that users see the site title."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:48
+msgid ""
+"To remove a logo, click the *clear* button in that block (only visible "
+"when a logo is active) and save changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:50
+msgid "Footer Content"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:51
+msgid ""
+"(All themes) A text field in which you can enter content to appear in the"
+" footer of the site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:54
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:56
+msgid "By default the message is Powered by Omeka S."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:58
+msgid "You can add HTML formatting to the text by manually adding the tags."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:61
+msgid "Top Navigation Depth"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:62
+msgid ""
+"(Default, Cozy, Foundation) Top Navigation Depth allows you the limit the"
+" depth of the top navigation menu on the public side of the site. The "
+"default setting, 0, does not restrict the number of levels of the top "
+"navigation menu. Setting it to one would only show the top-level pages or"
+" links of your site."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:65
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:67
+msgid "Color Selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:68
+msgid "(Default, Cozy, The Daily)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:70
+msgid ""
+"The themes Default, Cozy, and The Daily include an option to enter values"
+" for the *main accent color*; Cozy also has an option for the *navigation"
+" background color*."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:72
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:74
+msgid ""
+"The Main Accent color is used for link text and on-hover colors, as in "
+"the image below: "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:77
+msgid ""
+"The navigation background color sets the color of the navigation sidebar "
+"for the theme. "
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:80
+msgid ""
+"Edit either field by typing a [color "
+"value](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_colors) into the field. Either a"
+" triplet or a six-character hexadecimal code will work. Once you have "
+"entered a valid value, the color bar on the left will automatically "
+"update to show the color entered, even without saving changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:82
+msgid ""
+"The default values are stored in the prompt text for the field. For the "
+"Cozy theme, the default values are: main accent color is `087b94` and "
+"navigation background color is `bfdcdc`'"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:84
+msgid "Layout for Browse Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:85
+msgid ""
+"(Center Row, Foundation) Select how to display items within their browse "
+"views."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:88
+msgid ""
+"**Grid**: Items are organized into rows and columns. This is recommended "
+"for items that prominently feature images."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:89
+msgid "**List**: Items are stacked into a single column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:90
+msgid ""
+"**Toggle (default: grid):** Site visitors can choose to display the "
+"browse views as grids or lists, with grids as the default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:91
+msgid ""
+"**Toggle (default: list):** Site visitors can choose to display the "
+"browse views as grids or lists, with lists as the default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:93
+msgid "Foundation Theme Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:94
+msgid ""
+"Foundation is theme which comes with a few default stylesheets for fast "
+"prototyping or getting started with modifying themes. As a result it has "
+"some unique settings. For more information on using Foundation, including"
+" working with Sass, see the [theme ReadMe "
+"file](https://github.com/omeka-s-themes/foundation-s/blob/master/README.md)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:96
+msgid "Settings not described above:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:97
+msgid "**Stylesheet:** The theme provides 4 style options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:98
+msgid ""
+"**Default** uses ZURB Foundation's default styles for prototyping, which "
+"are all viewable in their documentation under the [Kitchen "
+"Sink](https://get.foundation/sites/docs/kitchen-sink.html)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:99
+msgid ""
+"**Revolution** aims to capture the feel of old documents and juxtaposes "
+"it with a bright red accent. It includes a textured paper background "
+"image."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:100
+msgid "**Sea Foam** offers a clean, friendly look with a teal palette."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:101
+msgid ""
+"**Inkwell** features a high contrast serif family for its typography, as "
+"well as sunny yellow accents."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:102
+msgid ""
+"**Navigation layouts:** Global navigation can display as a **horizontal "
+"top bar with optional dropdown menus** or a **left vertical column**."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:103
+msgid ""
+"**Show Top Navigation Child Pages:** Toggle display of child pages within"
+" the main navigation. If unchecked, only the top-level navigation will "
+"display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:104
+msgid ""
+"**Layout for Show Pages:** Resource metadata can show display as "
+"**stacked** with properties as headings above their values, or **inline**"
+" with properties as headings inline with their values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:105
+msgid ""
+"**Truncate Body Property:** Set how much of the browse body property "
+"displays on the browse page. You can:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:106
+msgid "**Show full value** which displays all of the property text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:107
+msgid ""
+"**Show 4 lines and fade out** which displays 4 lines of text with a fade "
+"at the end of the text block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:108
+msgid ""
+"**Show 4 lines and ellipses** which displays 4 lines of text concluding "
+"with an ellipses (...)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:110
+msgid "Installing themes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:111
+msgid ""
+"In order to appear in the *Themes* tab for sites, themes must be manually"
+" added to the `themes` folder of the installation, using an FTP program "
+"or an ssh connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:113
+msgid "To add a theme to the site using FTP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:115
+msgid "Download the zipped theme to your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:116
+msgid ""
+"Open your FTP client, log on to the server that houses the Omeka S "
+"install and navigate to the `/themes` folder (this should be located in "
+"the main folder of the install)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:117
+msgid "Upload the zipped theme to the `/themes` folder ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:118
+msgid "Unzip the theme."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_theme.md:120
+msgid ""
+"You can also use git to clone a theme directly from the git repository. "
+"Do this only if you are comfortable with git."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_users.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_users.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f7fb3f8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/sites/site_users.po
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:1
+msgid "User Permissions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:3
+msgid "To add a user to a site, navigate to the *User Permissions* tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:5
+msgid ""
+""
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:7
+msgid ""
+"A drawer on the right hand side of the screen shows all of the users for "
+"your install, sorted by the first letter of their first name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:9
+msgid "To add a user, click on their name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:11
+msgid "Then select their role from the dropdown:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:13
+msgid "*Viewer:* user can see the site’s backend but cannot edit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:14
+msgid ""
+"*Creator:* user can access and edit the site’s backend (this role is "
+"called \"Editor\" in Omeka S versions 1.x-2.x)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:15
+msgid ""
+"*Manager:* user has full administrative privileges for the site, "
+"including adding users and deleting the site (this role is called "
+"\"Admin\" in Omeka S versions 1.x-2.x)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:17
+msgid ""
+"You can add or revoke privileges for users by going back to the User "
+"permissions tab and selecting or deselecting the boxes and clicking Save."
+" Users can be deleted from the site by clicking the trash can icon on "
+"their row."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/sites/site_users.md:19
+msgid ""
+"Once you've added one or more users, click the Save button located in the"
+" upper right hand corner. To cancel your changes, click the Cancel button"
+" in the upper right hand corner."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/translateOmekaS.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/translateOmekaS.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..66da9097
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/docs/translateOmekaS.po
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual \n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 08:33+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n"
+"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:1
+msgid "Translate Omeka S"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:3
+msgid ""
+"We need the community's help translating English text in Omeka S into new"
+" languages, so users can have a variety of choices. You don't need to "
+"know how to write code to help translate Omeka S, you just need to be "
+"fluent in English and another language."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:5
+msgid "Getting Started"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:7
+msgid "Sign up on Transifex.com"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:8
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S uses [Transifex.com](https://www.transifex.com) to manage "
+"translations. To start helping to translate Omeka into other languages, "
+"you will first need to [sign up for an "
+"account](https://www.transifex.com/signup/). Transifex.net offers several"
+" plans, but since Omeka is an open-source project, you can use the Free "
+"plan."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:10
+msgid "Join or start a language team"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:11
+msgid ""
+"Once you have registered for an account, visit the [Omeka S project "
+"page](https://www.transifex.com/omeka/omeka-s/) and click on the \"Help "
+"Translate Omeka S\" or \"Join Team\" button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:13
+msgid ""
+"Here, you can choose among all the languages that are already being "
+"worked on. If you want to start work on a translation into a new language"
+" which isn't listed, you need to request that language first. Click "
+"\"cancel\" and scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the "
+"\"request language\" link, and select the language that you want to work "
+"on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:15
+msgid ""
+"On the other hand, if someone has already created a team for the language"
+" you want to work on, click the name of the language, and on the next "
+"screen click the \"Join this Team\" button. It will be up to the "
+"coordinator to approve your request to be a member of the team."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:17
+msgid ""
+"Once a coordinator has approved you to join the team, you can go to the "
+"Omeka S dashboard and click on the \"Translate\" button to begin "
+"translating."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:19
+msgid ""
+"If you want to check your translation or anything else you need to make "
+"an mo file from your po file, you can do it with msgfmt from the [GNU "
+"gettext package](http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:21
+msgid ""
+"For Transifex-specific issues, please see their "
+"[documentation](http://docs.transifex.com/)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:23
+msgid "Translation Guidelines"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:25
+msgid ""
+"Most of the strings to be translated in Omeka are straightforward and can"
+" be translated directly. However, there are a few special cases that need"
+" to be treated with care."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:27
+msgid "Placeholders"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:28
+#, python-format
+msgid ""
+"Some strings contain text that looks like `%s` or `%1$s`. These odd-"
+"looking bits of text are called **placeholders**. Placeholders are used "
+"to allow Omeka to insert some changing piece of information, like the "
+"number of items in an Omeka site, into a translated string."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:30
+msgid ""
+"If a source string contains placeholders, you must include them in your "
+"translation. You can move the placeholders around within the string, and "
+"even change the order of numbered placeholders in the string, but all the"
+" placeholders from the source string must appear in the translation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:32
+msgid "HTML and URLs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../docs/translateOmekaS.md:33
+msgid ""
+"A few strings contain embedded HTML code or URLs. You can translate and "
+"change the plain English text in these strings, but you should preserve "
+"any HTML tags or URLs."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/index.po b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/index.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..05953e44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/locales/fr/LC_MESSAGES/index.po
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
+# Copyright (C) 2021, Omeka Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Omeka S end user
+# manual package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR , 2021.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Omeka S end user manual\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-06-28 22:35+0000\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2021-06-28 10:36+0200\n"
+"Last-Translator: Julian Maurice \n"
+"Language: fr\n"
+"Language-Team: \n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1)\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Generated-By: Babel 2.9.1\n"
+
+#: ../../index.rst:15 ../../index.rst:52
+msgid "Sites"
+msgstr "Sites"
+
+#: ../../index.rst:19 ../../index.rst:64
+msgid "Resources"
+msgstr "Ressources"
+
+#: ../../index.rst:23 ../../index.rst:74
+msgid "Admin"
+msgstr "Admin"
+
+#: ../../index.rst:29 ../../index.rst:82
+msgid "Modules"
+msgstr "Modules"
+
+#: ../../index.rst:90
+msgid "Miscellaneous"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:3
+msgid "Omeka S User Manual"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:5
+msgid ""
+"Omeka S is a web publication system for universities, galleries, "
+"libraries, archives, and museums. It creates a local network of "
+"independently curated exhibits sharing a collaboratively built pool of "
+"items and their metadata."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:9
+msgid ""
+"The sections of this manual correspond to the navigation sections on the "
+"left-hand side of the :doc:`administrative dashboard `. of an Omeka S Installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:14
+msgid ""
+"Creating, editing, and managing sites, the public-facing parts of an "
+"Omeka S installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:18
+msgid ""
+"Creating, editing, and managing the content of an installation: items, "
+"item sets, media, vocabularies, and resource templates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:22
+msgid ""
+"Access to functionality in the admin section varies by user role, but can"
+" include: users, jobs, and settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:26
+msgid ""
+"This section opens with basic information on managing the modules which "
+"extend the functionality of your Omeka S installation and sites. It then "
+"offers specific documentaiton for Omeka S modules created by RRCHNM, "
+"listed in alphabetial order."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:31
+msgid ""
+"This manual also includes a :doc:`glossary `, instructions"
+" on conducting :doc:`searches `, and how to turn on "
+":doc:`error logging `."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:35
+msgid ""
+"Screencasts to supplement the documentation are linked from relevant "
+"pages, and can be browsed in the `Omeka S collection on Vimeo "
+"`_."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: ../../index.rst:39
+msgid "This documentation is CC-BY-NC"
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/make.bat b/make.bat
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2119f510
--- /dev/null
+++ b/make.bat
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+@ECHO OFF
+
+pushd %~dp0
+
+REM Command file for Sphinx documentation
+
+if "%SPHINXBUILD%" == "" (
+ set SPHINXBUILD=sphinx-build
+)
+set SOURCEDIR=.
+set BUILDDIR=_build
+
+if "%1" == "" goto help
+
+%SPHINXBUILD% >NUL 2>NUL
+if errorlevel 9009 (
+ echo.
+ echo.The 'sphinx-build' command was not found. Make sure you have Sphinx
+ echo.installed, then set the SPHINXBUILD environment variable to point
+ echo.to the full path of the 'sphinx-build' executable. Alternatively you
+ echo.may add the Sphinx directory to PATH.
+ echo.
+ echo.If you don't have Sphinx installed, grab it from
+ echo.http://sphinx-doc.org/
+ exit /b 1
+)
+
+%SPHINXBUILD% -M %1 %SOURCEDIR% %BUILDDIR% %SPHINXOPTS% %O%
+goto end
+
+:help
+%SPHINXBUILD% -M help %SOURCEDIR% %BUILDDIR% %SPHINXOPTS% %O%
+
+:end
+popd
diff --git a/mkdocs.yml b/mkdocs.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index ea586b8e..00000000
--- a/mkdocs.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-site_name: Omeka S User Manual
-theme:
- name: 'readthedocs'
- custom_dir: 'omeka/'
- include_homepage_in_sidebar: false
-repo_url: 'http://github.com/omeka/omeka-s-enduser'
-extra_css:
- - css/extra.css
-markdown_extensions:
- - toc:
- permalink:
-nav:
- - index.md
- - accessibility.md
- - s-planning-tips.md
- - install.md
- - admin-dashboard.md
- - glossary.md
- - search.md
- - frontpage.md
- - Sites:
- - sites/index.md
- - sites/site_settings.md
- - sites/site_pages.md
- - sites/site_navigation.md
- - sites/site_resources.md
- - sites/site_users.md
- - sites/site_theme.md
- - Resources:
- - content/items.md
- - content/item-sets.md
- - content/media.md
- - content/vocabularies.md
- - content/resource-template.md
- - Admin:
- - admin/users.md
- - admin/jobs.md
- - admin/settings.md
- - admin/assets.md
- - Modules:
- - modules/index.md
- - modules/collecting.md
- - modules/csseditor.md
- - modules/csvimport.md
- - modules/customvocab.md
- - modules/dspaceconnector.md
- - modules/extracttext.md
- - modules/facetedbrowse.md
- - modules/fedoraconnector.md
- - modules/filesideload.md
- - modules/itemcarouselblock.md
- - modules/mapping.md
- - modules/metadatabrowse.md
- - modules/numericdatatypes.md
- - modules/omeka2importer.md
- - Scripto:
- - modules/scripto/index.md
- - modules/scripto/scriptoproject.md
- - modules/scripto/themeingScripto.md
- - modules/scripto/scriptoPublicView.md
- - modules/scripto/troubleshootingScripto.md
- - modules/sharing.md
- - modules/valuesuggest.md
- - modules/zoteroimport.md
- - Miscellaneous:
- - errorLogging.md
- - translateOmekaS.md
- - configuration.md
diff --git a/requirements.txt b/requirements.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8c10e435
--- /dev/null
+++ b/requirements.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+sphinx==3.5.4
+sphinx-intl==2.0.1
+sphinx_rtd_theme==0.5.2
+myst-parser==0.15.1
+docutils<0.17
diff --git a/translation.md b/translation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c9210d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/translation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+# How to translate documentation
+
+Steps to follow to translate in french:
+
+1. make gettext
+2. sphinx-intl update --language fr
+3. Translate the PO with Poedit
+4. sphinx-intl build
+5. make -e SPHINXOPTS="-D language='fr'" clean html
+
+## Sphinx configuration for translation
+
+https://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/3.x/usage/configuration.html#options-for-internationalization